Tải bản đầy đủ (.docx) (157 trang)

Giao an Tieng anh K10

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.13 MB, 157 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

<b>Date of preparing: 10st August 2008</b>


<b>Date of teaching:</b>




<b>Period 1.</b>



<b>Híng dÉn häc và kiểm tra môn Tiếng Anh</b>


<b>I. Cấu tạo 1 bài häc, c¸ch häc:</b>


Mỗi bài học chia làm 5 tiết gồm 5 kỹ năng: nghe, nói, đọc, viết, ngữ âm và từ vựng.


Mỗi bàI học là 1 chủ đề riêng biệt và đợc thể hiện xuyên suốt các kỹ năng. ví dụ: chủ



đề tình bạn, kinh nghiệm bản thân, bữa tiệc, tình nguyện

…………

..



Học sinh sẽ học các tình huống liên quan đén chủ đề chung đẻ từ đó nói lên quan


điểm của mình về các vấn đề xoay quanh chủ đề đó.



Học sinh làm việc theo nhóm, theo cặp, độc lập hay cả lớp dưới sự hớng dẫn của


giáo viên.



II. Cấu tạo bài kiểm tra:



-

Kiểm tra miệng: Gv kiĨm tra ngay trªn líp, tríc bi häc, trong lóc lun tËp



hc ci tiÕt häc.



-

Gv cũng có thể dùng những bàI hoạt động theo nhóm để lấy điểm miệng.



-

Gv chọn 1 trong các kỹ năng để kiểm tra mức độ hiểu bàI của học sinh.




-

Kiểm tra 45 phút thờng gồm 4 phần: nghe, đọc, viết, ngữ pháp và từ vựng.



Nghe: 8 câu trắc nghiệm



Đọc : 6 câu trắc nghiệm + 4 câu tự luận


ViÕt: 10 c©u tù luËn



Ngữ pháp và từ vựng: 12 câu trắc nghiệm


<b>Unit 1</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


-

Ps understand the text about daily routine.



-

Vocabulary, questions and answers



-

Aims: a daily life



-

Develop extensive listening skill



-

Use the information they have listened todo the other communicative tasks follow



- Ss will be able to write a narrative by using given prompts


- Identifying the soujnds / I / and / i : /



- Reviewing the present and past simple tense and adverbs of frequen


<b>II. Materials:</b>


-

Picture, tape, cassette,

.






<b>III. Devision of the unit:</b>


-

Period 2: reading



-

Period 3: speaking



-

Period 4: listening



-

Period 5: writing



-

Period 6: language focus



<b>Date of preparing: 12th August 2008</b>


<b>Period 2</b>



<b>unit 1 : a day in a life of...</b>


<b>period 1-Reading</b>


<b>I . Aim</b>


Reading for specific information about a day in the life of a farmer


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their daily routines by


learning a typical day of a farmer.



<b>III . Materials</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>arrangemen</b><b>Work</b></i>
<i><b>t</b></i>

7'



<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Chatting</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pairs then tell them to ask and answer about


their daily routines by using the cues:



E.g :

<i><b>What time/ you /often/ get up?</b></i>



A :

<i><b>What time do you often get up?</b></i>


B : I often get up at six.



<b>. </b>

<i><b>What time/you/ go /to school / have breakfast / lunch /</b></i>


<i><b>dinner / go to bed.</b></i>



<i><b>. </b></i>

<i><b>What/ you/ often /do in the morning / afternoon / evening.</b></i>



Pair work



10'



<b>before you read</b>
<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>Plough(v)- cµy</i>


<i>Harrow(v)- bõa</i>




<i>plot of land-một miếng đất, mảnh ruộng</i>


<i>fellow- đồng nghiệp, cùng là nông dân</i>


<i>take a short rest(v)- nghỉ giải lao ngắn</i>


<i>transplant - cấy</i>



<b>Checking technique</b>
<b>Sentence modeling</b>


- Ask Ss to make sentences with the above words to make sure


they understand their meanings



Whole class



5'



5'



<b>while you read</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You are going to read two passages about a day in the life of</i>


<i>two farmers.</i>



<b>Task 1 - Multiple choice</b>


Ask Ss to read the passages individually and choose the option A,B


or C that best suits the meaning of the italicized work (s).



Advise Ss to read the passages quickly and stop at the lines


that contain the word to guess the closest meaning.




Go around the class and provide help if necessary. Call on


some Ss to read their answer. Ask them to explain their choice.



Give correct answers:



<b>1.c 2.c 3.a 4.a</b>


<b>Task 2 - Answering questions</b>


- Have Ss work in pairs and answer about the passages.



- Call on some pairs to do the task in front of the class. Give


feedback and suggested answers:



<i>1. He's a peasant / a farmer.</i>



<i>2. He get up at 4:30 and then goes down the kitchen to boil</i>


<i>some water for his morning tea.</i>



<i>3. In the morning, he ploughs and harrows his plot of land,</i>


<i>drinks tea and smokes tobacco during his break.</i>



<i>4. in the afternoon, they repair the banks of their plot of land.</i>


<i>Mr. Vy pumps water into it and his wife does the transplanting.</i>


<i>5. Yes, they are. because they love working and they love </i>

<i>their</i>


<i>children.</i>



<b>Task 3 - Note completion.</b>


- Ask Ss to scan the passage and make a brief note about Mr.




Vy and Mrs. Tuyet's daily routines.



- Tell Ss to compare their notes with a friend.


- Give correct answers:



Individual


work



<i>4:30: the alarm goes off and Mr.Vy gets up, goes down </i>
<i>the kitchen, boil water for tea, drink tea, has </i>
<i>quick breakfast, leads buffalo to field.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

5'

Pair work



10'

<b>after you read</b>


- Ask Ss to work in group and talk about Mr.Vy and Mrs.


Tuyet's daily routines.



- Call on some Ss to give a short talk about the daily routines of


these two farmers.



-Correct Ss' pronunciation mistakes

.



Group work



3'

<b>wrapping</b>


-Summarise the main points.




-Assign homework.

Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 14th <sub>2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 3</b>



<b>unit 1- period 2- speaking</b>


<b>I . Aim</b>


Speaking about one's daily routine


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about his or her daily routines by


using given information and pictures.



<b>III. Materials</b>


Textbook, small cards of class timetable,...


<b>IV. Procedure</b>




<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>



10'


<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Networks</b>


<i><b>Revision of school Subjects</b></i>


- Ask Ss to work in groups of 3 to 4 and make a list of the


subjects they learn at school.



The groups with the most words with in a limited time will


be the winner.



Note that all the words with wrong spellings are not


coujnted as the correct ones.



- Feedback and further explain all the subjects mentioned


above especially the ones Ss are not familiar with.





Group work



10'


<b>presentation</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>Quan is a tenth-grade student. He goes to school every</i>


<i>morning. Now, look at his weekly timetable on page 15.Ask</i>



<i>and answer questions </i>

<i> with a partner, using the information</i>


<i>from the timetable.</i>



Ex:



A: What time does Quan have Civic Education lesson on Monday?


<i>B: He has Civic Education lesson at 7:15 a.m </i>



<i>A: What lesson does Quan have at 7:15 a.m on Monday? </i>


<i>B: ( At 7:15 on Monday he has) Civic Education lesson.</i>


- Let Ss work in pairs for about 7 to 10 minutes about


Quan's routine.



Pair work



<b>practice</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

15'

<i>What is Quan doing in picture a)? Is he getting up...?</i>

<sub>- Ask Ss to describe Quan's activities during the day.</sub>



- Go to different pairs and offer help if necessary.


- Feedback and give suggested answer.



<i>Everyday Quan gets up at 14:00. then he studies for about</i>


<i>two hours. He watches TV at 16:30. At 17:00 he rides to the</i>


<i>stadium to play football with other boys in the neighborhood.</i>


<i>He gets back home at 18:30. After having a shower he has</i>


<i>dinner with his family at 19;00. He prepares for the</i>


<i>following day's lesson at 20;00.</i>



Pair work




7' <b>further practice</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups of 3 to 4 and talk about their daily


routines.



Note : Ss to only talk about their main / important activities.


- Call on some Ss to present in front of the class.



- Have other Ss comment on presenters' performance


regarding content and pronunciation.



Group work



3' <b>wrapping</b>


-Summarise the main points.


-Assign homework.



Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 15th<sub> 2008</sub></b>



<b>Period 4</b>



<b>unit 1- period 3- listening</b>


<b>I . Aim</b>


Listening for specific information


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :


- Talk about a day in the life a cyclo driver.



- Improve listening skill by doing Pictures Ordering and True or false exercises.


<b>III . Materials</b>


Textbook, cassette.


IV . Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Categorizing</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

7'


<i>He works in the streets. </i>


<i>He works with children.</i>


<i>He lives in the country.</i>



<i>He gets people from one place to another.</i>



<i>He corrects homework.</i>



<i>He works in school.</i>


<i>He meet a lot of people.</i>


<i>He works on the farm.</i>



<b>He is a farmer</b> <b>He is a teacher</b> <b>He is a cyclo driver</b>


-Feedback and give correct answers:



<i><b>He is a farmer</b></i> <i><b>He is a teacher</b></i> <i><b>He is a cyclo driver</b></i>


<i> He gets up very early.</i>
<i>He lives in the country.</i>


<i>He works on the farm.</i>


<i>He works with children.</i>
<i> He corrects</i>
<i>homework.</i>


<i>He works in school.</i>


<i>He works in the streets. </i>
<i>He gets people from one</i>
<i>place to another </i>


<i>He meet a lot of people.</i>


Group work




10'


<b>before you listen</b>
<b>Ask and answer</b>


-Tell Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer the following


questions:



<i>Have you ever travelled by cyclo?</i>


<i>When was it?</i>



<i>Is it interesting to travel by cyclo?</i>



<i>Which do you prefer, going by bicycle or by cyclo?</i>


<i>Give reason(s)?</i>



<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>

<i>district(n) - quận, huyện</i>


<i> drop(v) - chở ai đó đến nơi...</i>


<i> passengers(n) - hành khách</i>


<b>Checking technique.</b>


<b>Guessing</b>


- Write all the new words on the board.



- Explain each word separately then ask Ss to guess what the


meaning of word is.




<b>Set the scene</b>


<i> * </i>

<i>Mr. Lam is a cyclo driver. He is working in Ho Chi Minh city.</i>


<i>Let's guess his routine. What does he do in his job?</i>



- Encourage Ss to feel free to have guess about Mr. Lam's routine.



Pair work


and


Whole class



10'


10'


<b>while you listen</b>
<b>Task 1 - Pictures Ordering</b>


-Play the tape several times if necessary.



-Ask Ss to listen to Mr. Lam's talk about his daily routine and


number the pictures in their correct order.



-Have Ss compare their answer with a friend.


-Feedback and give correct answers:



a . 3 b . 5 c . 4 d . 6 e . 1 f . 2


<b>Task 2 - True or false</b>


- Let Ss read statements carefully.




-Play the tape again and ask Ss to listen and decide whether the


statements are true or false.



- Draw ss' attention to key words when they are listening.


- Call on some Ss to explain their answers.



- Give correct answers:


<i>1. F ( Not give)</i>



<i>2. T</i>



<i>3. F (he take his passengers from District 5 to District 1)</i>


<i>4. F ( His first passenger is an old man.)</i>



<i>5. F ( He has lunch at food stall near Ben thanh Market.)</i>


<i>6. F ( He takes a short rest.)</i>



Individual


work and


Whole class



Individual


work and


Whole class




<b>after you listen</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

5'



Mr.Lam's activities by using the cues below:



<i>name...start...work...lunch...</i>


<i>....occupation...passengers...rest.</i>



- Go around the class and offer help if necessary.



- Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of class.


-Feedback and give Suggested answers:



What is the man's name?


<i> What does he do?</i>



<i> What time does he start work?</i>



<i> Who are his passengers? / Is his passenger an old man?</i>


<i> Does he take a rest?</i>



Pair work




3'


<b>wrapping</b>

- Summarise the main points.



-Assign homework.

Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation</b>:



...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 16th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 5</b>



<b>unit 1- period 4- writing</b>


<b> I . Aim </b>


Writing a narrative


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a narrative by using given prompts.


<b>III . Materials</b>


Textbook, write board markers...


IV . Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


10'



<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Noughts and Crosses</b>


- Draw a table containing 9 words in each cell.



- Divide class into two groups:

<i><b>noughts(O) </b></i>

and

<i><b>Crosses(X).</b></i>




- Ask Ss to choose word by word in the cells and make


sentences with each word. A correct sentence gets one


O or X . The group with 3 O or X vertically, horizontally or


even diagonally first will be the winner.



at first

before

until



then

after

as soon as



in the end

while

since then



Note : The sentences must be grammatically correct and make sense.



Group work



10'



<b>Presentation</b>
<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>be due to (a) - bëi v×</i>



<i>Stare reath in the face ( v) - sợ xanh mặt</i>


<i>take off ( v) - cất cánh</i>



<i>ải-hostess (n) - tiếp viên hàng không</i>


<i>fasten seatbelt ( v) - thắt dây an toàn</i>


<i>be in danger (v) - gỈp nguy hiĨm</i>




- Ask Ss to work in pairs, read the passage ( a narrative ) in the


book and find all the verbs and connectors in front of the class.


- Give suggested answer :



Verbs: start, was. arrived, got, took off, began, thought,


<i>were, told, seemed, realied, warn, screamed, thought, felt,</i>


<i>announces, was, landed.</i>



<b>Connectors : on that day, at first, then, just, a few minutes</b>


<i>later, one hour later.</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

- Explain to Ss the format of a narrative: the vents, the climax,


and the conclusion.



- Tell Ss to work in groups and identify the events, the climax, and the


conclusion of the story. Ask them to report the results to class.



- Give the answers and explain the development of the story.


The events : Got on plane, plane took off, hostesses were just


<i>beginning to serve lunch when plane began to shake, plane</i>


<i>seemed to dip, people screamed in panic.</i>



The climax : We thought we had only minutes to live.



<b>The conclusion : pilot announced that everything was all</b>


<i>right, we landed safely.</i>



15'



<b>practice</b>



- Instruct the task. tell them to work individually, use the


prompts and follow the development of writing sample in task


1 to build up a narrative about a hotel fire.



- Go around the class and offer help if necessary. Encourage


Ss to finish the writing under time pressure.



- Ask Ss to have peer correction. Tell them to pay attention to


mistakes regarding verb tenses and prepositions.



Individual


work



7'

<b>production</b>


- Call on some Ss to read aloud their writing in front of the class.


- Comment and correct necessary mistakes.



- Give suggested answer :



<i> Last year, I spent my summer holiday at a seaside town. The</i>


<i>hotel was modern and comfortable. I had a wonderful holiday</i>


<i>until the fire. It was Saturday evening and everybody was</i>


<i>sitting in the discotheque ( which was ) on the ground floor. It</i>


<i>was crowded with people. They were dancing and singing</i>


<i>happily. Suddenly we smelt smoke. Then black smoke began to</i>


<i>fill the room. Everybody sten®et to scream in panic. People</i>


<i>ran toward the fire exits. One door was blocked. Many people</i>


<i>began to coughing and choking.</i>




<i> Then, just as we thought we had only minutes to live, the fire</i>


<i>bridge arrived. Firemen fought their way into the room and</i>


<i>soon everyone was safely out of the building. Luckily nobody</i>


<i>was seriously hurt, It was the most frightening experience of</i>


<i>my life.</i>



Individual


work and


Whole class



3'



<b>wrapping</b>

-Summarize the main points.



- Assign homework.



Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 18th<sub> 2008</sub></b>



<b>Period 6</b>



<b>unit 1- period 5- language focus</b>


<b>I . Aim</b>


Identifying the sounds / I / and / i : /



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to be more confident in pronouncing the


sounds / I / and / i : / and better at using the present and past simple tense and adverbs


of frequency.



<b>III . Materials</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers...


<b> IV . Procedure</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i>


<i><b>Work</b></i>
<i><b>arrangemen</b></i>


<i><b>t</b></i>

5'



<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Categorizing</b>


_ Ask Ss to work in groups. Give out 10 to 15 words and tell


Ss to put them under appropriate heading :




<i><b>Adverbs of</b></i>


<i><b>manner</b></i> <i><b>Adverbs of</b><b>frequency</b></i> <i><b>Adverbs of </b><b>time</b></i>

Adverbs : tomorrow, usually, carefully, beautifully, hardly,


<i>yesterday,...</i>



Group work



5'

<b>Pronunciation</b>


<b>presentation 1</b>


-Demonstrate the sounds / I / and / i : / by pronouncing them


clearly and slowly.



-Help Ss to distinguish these two sounds.


-Instruct the way to pronounce :



/ i: / : is a long sound



/ I / : first practice the sound / i: /. Then open your mouth a


more.



/ I / is a short sound.



Whole class



5'

<b>practice 1</b>


- Play the tape and ask them to repeat.




-Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to class.


-Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.


-Introduce peer correction.



- Go around the class and provide help if necessary.



Pair work



5'



<b>grammar and vocabulary</b>
<b>presentation 2</b>


<b>Review the present simple tense</b>


-Ask Ss to work in pairs and discuss the form and use of the


present simple tense.



-Call some Ss to answer some questions regarding the use


and form of the present simple tense :



<i> When do we use this tense?</i>



<i> What adverbs of frequency does it go with?</i>



<i>...</i>


<i> Note : Ss have been quite familiar with this tense so Ts are</i>


suggested not to spend too much time on this presentation.




Pair work



5'



<b>practice 2 </b>


- Ask Ss to work individually and complete the blanks in the


passage. Use the correct simple present form of the verbs in


the box. ( There are more verbs more than once. )



- Ask Ss to compare the answers with a friend.


- Call on Ss to read the completed passage.


Give correct answers :



<i> Fishing(1) is </i>

<i>my favorite sport. I often (2) fish for hours</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<i>without catching anything, but this dose not (3) worry me.</i>


<i>Some fishermen (4) are unlucky. Instead of catching fish.</i>


<i>they (5) catch old boots and rubbish. I (6) am even less</i>


<i>lucky. I never (7) catch anything - not even old boots. After</i>


<i>having spent whole mornings on the river. I always (8) go</i>


<i>home with an empty bag. " you must (9) give up fisting ! ",</i>


<i>my friend (10) says. " It's a waste of time ". But they don't</i>


<i>(11) realize that I (12) am not really interested in fisting. I'm</i>


<i>only interested in sitting in a boat, doing nothing at all.</i>


5'



<b>presentation 3</b>
<i><b>Revision of adverbs of frequency </b></i>



<b>* Use</b>


-Adverbs of frequency show how often something happens.


<i>Always/ Usually/ Normally/ Often/ Sometime/ Never</i>


<b>* Position </b>


-We put the adverbs of frequency :


- In front of normal verb:



We never go to bed late.



- Between an auxiliary verb and the main verb:


He doesn't usually read newspapers after dinner.


- After the verb to be :



I am always free on Sundays.



Note : We put as a rule at the beginning of the sentence.



Whole class



5'

<b>practice 3</b>


-

Ask Ss to do exercise 2. Put each of the adverbs in its



correct order into the sentences in the book.



Note ; this is an easy exercise. For the better classes, This


exercise can be done orally.




-Call on some Ss to read aloud their sentences to class.


Feedback and give correct answers:



He usually gets up early.


<i> She is never late for school.</i>



<i> Lan sometimes practices speaking English.</i>


<i> Thao is always a hard-working student.</i>



Individual


work



5'



<b> presentation 4 </b>
<b>Revision of the past simple tense. </b>


<b> * Use</b>


-

We use the past simple tense to describe:



<i><b>a completed action or situation in the past.</b></i>

<i>Eg: We went to the cinema yesterday.</i>



-Ask Ss to make more sentences with the past simple tense.



Whole class



5'




<b>practice 4</b>


-Ask Ss to work in pairs and supply the correct past simple


form of the verbs in the brackets.



-Remind Ss to have correct past form of some irregular


verbs.



-Call on some Ss to read the completed passage aloud in


front of the class.



-Give correct answer :



1. was done 10. crept


<i> 2. cooked 11. slept</i>


<i> 3. were 12. woke</i>


<i> 4. smelt 13.was </i>


<i> 5. told 14. leapt</i>


<i> 6.sang 15.hurried</i>


<i> 7. began 16.found</i>


<i> 8. felt 17. wound</i>


<i> 9.put on 18. flowed</i>



Pair work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

-Summarise the main points.



-Assign homework.

Whole class




<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 20th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 7</b>



<b>unit 2- School talk</b>


<b>period 1- Reading</b>


<b> I . Aim </b>


Reading passages about schools and related problems


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their school and better their reading


comprehension skill by doing True or False exercise and Answering question.



<b>III . Materials</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markets...


IV . Procedure



<b>time</b> <b>steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>work</b>


5'




<b>warm-up</b>
<b>Chatting</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pair and discuss this question:



<i><b>When you meet your friends, which of following topics do</b></i>
<i><b>you often talk about?</b></i>


<i> Sport and games</i>


<i> Entertainment</i>


<i> Health problems</i>


<i> Hobbies</i>



<i> Holiday</i>


<i> Films</i>



<i> The weather</i>


<i> work and study</i>



<i> Note : Encourage Ss to talk about the topics which are not</i>


mentioned in the book suck as : fashion, food, picnic, TV,


<i>extra class,....</i>



Pair work



7'



<b>before you read</b>
<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>



<i><b>Matching</b></i>


-Ask Ss to work in groups and match the subject in A with


the information in B



<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1. Biology a. Poem, novel, Nguyen Du


2. Math b. Newton, Olm


3. Physics c. Chemicals, H2O
4. Chemistry d. Number, minus, Pascal
5. History e. Geology, climate
6. Geography f. Animals, plants. DNA...


7.Vietnamse Literature g. Revolution, The first world War...


<i>Give correct answer :</i>


<i> 1 . f 2 . d 3 . b 4 . c </i>
<i> 5 . g 6 . e 7 . a</i>


<b>Gerund and to - Infinitive introduction</b>


*

Like



Enjoy => + V- ing


Love




* Want



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

Hope => + to - infinitive


Decide



7'



7'



<b>while you read</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You are going to read three talks given by a study, a teacher and a</i>
<i>student's father about school. You read them and do the tasks assigned.</i>


<b>Task 1 - Gap-filling</b>


- Ask Ss to work independently and fill each blank with one of


the words in the box. There are more words than the blanks.


-Have Ss compare the answer with a friend.



- Feedback and give correct answer :



<i>1. Young children enjoy helping household tasks.</i>


<i>2. We were stuck in heavy traffic for more than an hour.</i>
<i>3. I think you don't have to worry about your weight.</i>


<i>4. It was two weeks before Christmas and the mall was crowded</i>


<i>with people.</i>


<i>5.If two people speak the same language, they usually have the</i>


<i>similar attitudes and opinions</i>.


<b>Task 2 - Finding who...</b>

-Ask Ss to work in pair.



+ Read the small talks again and find out who...



- Encourage Ss to discuss with their partners to get the


correct answers:



- Call on some pairs to explain their answers to class.


- Give correct answers:



<i> enjoy teaching. Miss Phuong </i>


<i> has to get up early. Phong</i>



<i> live far from school Phong</i>



<i> loves working with children. Miss Phuong </i>


<i> loves learning English. Phong</i>



<i> rides a bike to school everyday. Phong</i>


<i> study at a high school. Phong</i>



<i>teaches English at a high school. Miss Phuong </i>


<i>worries about someone else's safety. Mr. Hong Ha</i>



<b>Task 3 - Answering Questions</b>


Ask Ss to keep on working in pair. Read the talks more


carefully and answer the questions.



Call one some Ss to read aloud the question in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers:



<i>1. He study at Chu van An High School.</i>


<i> 2. He study many subject such as Math, physics, chemistry.</i>
<i> 3. Because it is an international language.</i>


<i> 4. She says that teaching is hard work, but she enjoys it because</i>
<i>she loves working with children.</i>


<i> 5. Because his son has to ride his bike in narrow and crowded</i>
<i>streets on the way to school.</i>


Individual


work



Pair work



Pair work



9'



<b>after you read</b>

-Tell Ss to work in groups :




<i><b>Choose one of the following topics and talk about it for about 5</b></i>
<i><b>minutes.</b></i>


What subjects you like learning best and why.


<i> What you like or dislike doing at school.</i>


<i> What you worry about at school.</i>



- Go to different groups and offer help if necessary.


<i><b>Suggested answers</b></i><b>:</b>


<i> I like learning English best because it is very interesting to</i>


<i>learn. In class, we can exchange ideas and discus various topics</i>


<i>in English. Besides, we play a lot of exciting and useful games.</i>


<i>At home, I can watchman TV programs such as film, game</i>


<i>shows and talk shows in English. It is very interesting to watch</i>


<i>TV shows and learn English at the same time.</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

2’

<b>wrapping</b>


- Summarize the main points.



- Assign homework.



Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...


...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: August 24th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 8</b>



<b>unit 2- period 2-speaking</b>


<b>I . Aim</b>


Making small talks in daily situations


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:



- Use common expressions in making small talks.


- Start and close a conversation.



<b>III . Materials</b>


Textbook, small carts...


IV . Procedure



<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


7’

<b>Rearranging</b> <b>warm-up</b>


-Have Ss work in pairs.




-Give out 5 to 7 sentences whose words are not in good order.


-Ask Ss to rearrange the words to make complete sentences.


<i>1. has, nice, to, you, talking, been, it, very.</i>



<i>2. weekend, did, nice, have, a, you?</i>


<i>3. up, later, catch, you, with.</i>



<i>4. school, everything, how, at, is?</i>


<b>Answers:</b>


<i>1. It has been very nice talking to you.</i>
<i>2. Did you have a nice weekend?</i>
<i>3. Catch up with you later.</i>
<i>4. How's everything at school?</i>


Pair work



10'



<b>presentation</b>

- Ask Ss to look at Task 1 in the book.



- Have Ss work in pair to put the expressions which are


commonly used in making small talks under appropriate



heading : Starting a conversation

and Closing a



<i>conversation.</i>



Note : For some Ss, this activity is easy, but it would be difficult due



to some unfamiliar structures which need explaining:



How's everything at school?



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

<i> Catch up with you later.</i>



Have Ss practice these expressions with his/her partner.


Feedback and give correct answers:



<b>Starting a conversation</b> <b>Closing a conversation</b>


<i>Good morning</i> <i>Goodbye. See you later.</i>


<i>How's everything at school?</i> <i>Well, it's been nice talking to you</i>
<i>Hello. how are you?</i> <i>Sorry. I ve got to go. Talk to you later.</i>’
<i>Hi. How is school?</i> <i>Great. I'll see you tomorrow.</i>


<i>Hello. What are you doing?</i> <i>Catch up with you later.</i>


10'



5'



<b>practice</b>
<b>Task 2 - Sentences Rearrangement</b>


- Ask Ss to do Task 2 in pair: Rearrange the sentences to make


an appropriate conversation.



Note : Ss may study the expression in Task 1 again to have the



correct rearrangement.



- Call on some pair to practice the conversation in front of the class.


- T. should draw Ss' attention to intonation and stress beside pronunciation


- Comment on Ss' performance and give correct answers:



<i> <b>1 . D. 2 . F 3 .B 4 . H </b></i>
<i><b> 5 . E 6 . C 7 . G 8 . A</b></i>
<b>Task 3 - conversation completion</b>


- Ask Ss to keep on working in pair: Complete the conversation


with suitable words, phrases or sentences in the box.



- Call on some pairs to practice the completed conversation in


front of the class.



- Give suggested answers:



<i><b>A: Hello, Hoa. You don't look very happy. What's the matter</b></i>


<i><b>with you?</b></i>



<i><b>B : Hi. Nam. I feel tired. I' v got a headache.</b></i>



<i><b>A: sorry to hear that. You'd better go home and have a rest.</b></i>


<i><b>B : Yes. That's a great idea. Goodbye, Nam.</b></i>



<i><b>A: see you later.</b></i>



Pair work




Pair work



10'

- Have Ss choose another partner to form a new pair and then

<b>Further practice</b>


make a small talk on the following topic:


<i> The weather</i>



<i> Last night's TV Programs</i>


<i> Football </i>



<i> Plans for the next weekend</i>



-Ask Ss to use the starting and ending of a conversation.



- Call on some pairs to act out the conversation in front of the class.


- Ask other Ss to comment on their conversations.



- Feedback and give suggested answers:


<i>A : Hi. How are you today?</i>



<i>B : I'm fire. thank you. Did you watch TV last night. </i>



<i>A: It's a pity. I had to finish my homework last night. Is there</i>


<i>anything interesting?</i>



<i>B : Yes. It's the first time a contestant could answer 13 out of 15</i>


<i>questions in the game show Who wants to be millionaire. He is</i>


<i>very brilliant.</i>



<i>A: Really? I will try to Finis homework early tomorrow so that I</i>



<i>will be able to watch the repeated broadcast at 8 p.m.</i>



<i>B : That's a good idea. I got to go now. See you then. </i>


<i>A: Take care. Bye.</i>



Pair work



3'



<b>wrapping</b>


-Summarize the main points.



-Assign homework.

Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...


<b>Date of preparing: August 28th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>unit 2- period 3- listening</b>


<b> I . Aim</b>


Listening to mini conversations for specific information


<b>II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make mini conversations about daily


topics such as study at school, weather and traveling...




<b>III . Materials</b>


<b> Textbook, cassette...</b>


<b> IV . Procedure</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


5'

<b>warm-up</b>


<b>Conversation Build</b>


-

Give out some key words from the conversation in the last period.



E.g: Hi,....How?... fine...nice weekend?...


<i> wonderful...to ...the beach...</i>



- Ask Ss to work in pairs and build a conversation basing on the class.


Make necessary comments before starting the new lesson.



Pair work



10'

<b>before you listen</b>


<b>Matching</b>


- Ask Ss to work in pair and match a question in A with a


response in B.



- Cal on some pair to read aloud the question and response in


front of the class.




-Feedback and give correct answers:



1 . c 2 . e 3 . a 4 . b 5 . d



- If time allowed, encourage Ss to discuss the topics further.


Pictures description



-Keep Ss in pair and ask them to ask answer about the pictures.


T may also directly ask Ss.



- Suggested questions:



What do you see in the pictures?


<i> Who are they?</i>



<i> What are they doing?</i>



- Make sure Ss see all the details of the pictures clearly before


playing the tape.



Pair work



7'



7'



<b>While you listen</b>
<b>Task 1 - Matching</b>



-Ask Ss to listen to the conversations and match them with the


pictures.



-Play the tape more than once if necessary.



-Tell Ss to listen for main ideas and key words, not for specific


information in the first time.



- Call on some Ss to explain their answers to class.


- Feedback and give correct answers:



Conversation 1 : Picture b


Conversation 2 : Picture c


Conversation 3 : Picture d


Conversation 4 : Picture a


<b>Task 2 - Answering Questions</b>


- Have Ss listen to the tape again and answer the questions.


- Let Ss listen to the tape several time if necessary and have a


pause between conversations to make it easier for Ss while they


are doing the task.



- Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers in front of the class


-Give correct answers:



<i>1. She takes English.</i>


<i>2. She is in Miss Lan Phuong's class.</i>
<i>3. He is at a party.</i>



Individual


work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

7

'


<i>4. He stays there for a week.</i>


<i>5. No, she doesn't. She travels alone</i>.


<b>Task 3 - conversation completion</b>


-Ask Ss to work in pair and study the conversation. Encourage


them to guess the missing words,



- Play the last conversation again.



-Ask Ss to listen to it and complete the conversation by filling


in the missing information.



<i>Note : This task may cause difficulty to some Ss because it</i>


requires Ss to write down the exact words in the tape.



- Call on some pairs to practice the completed conversation.


- Comment on Ss' performance and give correct answers:



<i>A : Hoa. How do you like (1) it here?</i>


<i>B : It's (2) very nice. The hotel is(3 big and my room is(4) comfortable.</i>
<i>A: Are you (5) trevelling with your friends?</i>



<i>B : (6) No. I'm traveling alone.</i>


<i>A : Would you like to go somewhere (8) for a drink?</i>
<i>B : That's great.</i>


<b>Typescript</b>
<b>Conversation 1</b>


...


<b>Conversation 2</b>


...


<b>Conversation 3</b>


...


<b>Conversation 4</b>


...


6'



<b>after you listen</b>


-Ask Ss to work in group of 3 or 4 and discuss the problems


they experienced ay school.



- Suggest the common problems at school : Getting bad marks,



<i>having difficulty in marking friend, coming to lass late, be slow</i>


<i>at learning...</i>



- During the discussion, Ss should use these questions:



<i>What problems have you got at school?</i>


<i> What is / are the reasons(s)</i>


<i> What have you done to solve it / them?</i>
<i> Who helps you to solve it?</i>


Go around the class and offer help if necessary.



Group work



<b>wrapping</b>

Summarize the main points.



Assign homework.



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

<b>Date of preparing: 30th<sub> August, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 10</b>



<b>unit 2- period 4- writing</b>


<b> I . Aim</b>



Filling in a form


<b> II . Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ;



- Fill some common forms such as enrolment form, simple application form,


<i>library admission form,...</i>



- Use useful words and structures in some certain forms,


<b> III . Materials</b>


<b> Textbook, whiteboard markers...</b>


Samples of some common forms.


<b> IV . Procedure</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


5'

<b>Task 1 - Q $ A</b> <b>warm-up</b>


Ask Ss to work in pair and answer the following questions:


<i> Have you ever filled in a form? on what occasions?</i>



<i>What sort of information do you often have to provide when</i>


<i>you fill in a form...</i>



Give examples of some commonly-used forms: application


<i>form, entry admission form...</i>



Pair work




10'

<b>presentation</b>


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>Country of origin : Qơª qóan</i>


<i>Present address : địa chỉ, chỗ ở hiện tại</i>
<i>Marital status: tình trạng hơn nhân</i>
<i>Occupation: ngh nghip</i>


<i>Block capitals : Chữ viết hoa</i>
<i>Delete ; xoá</i>


<i>Applicable :thích hỵp</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<b> Task 2 - Matching</b>


Ask Ss do task 2. Match a line in A with a question in B.


Have Ss compare their answers with a partner.



Explain and give correct answers:



<i>1. First name - What's your first name?</i>
<i>2. Surname - What's your surname?</i>
<i>3. Date of birth - When were you born?</i>
<i>4. Country of origin - Where were you born?</i>


<i>5. Present address - Where are you living at the moment?</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<i>6. Marital status - Are you married or single?</i>
<i>7. Occupation - What do you do?</i>


*Note : T may introduce more questions than are used in a


form:



<b>Place of birth</b> : <i>Where were you born?</i>


<b>Telephone number</b> : <i>What's your telephone number</i>?


...


5'



<b>practice</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>As you know, forms ask you to do certain things. And it is</i>


<i>important to understand what they require you to do. now look</i>


<i>at Task 3 and try to do what you are required to do.</i>



<b>Task 3 - Doing what Forms ask</b>

Have Ss do the task individually.



Go around the class and provide help if necessary.



Further explain and translate into Vietnamese if necessary.



<i>1. Write your name in block capitals </i>
<i>2. Sign your name</i>



<i>3. Delete where not applicable</i>
<i>4. Put a cross if you are male</i>
<i>5. Put a tick you are female</i>


<b>Task 4 - Filling in the form</b>


- Ask Ss to study the form carefully and fill in the form using


their own information.



- Call on 2 Ss to fill in the form on the board while others


doing the task in the textbook.



- Tell Ss to look at the board and comment on their


performance.



- Correct the form as the whole class.



Individual


and


Pair work



12'

<b>production</b>


-

Ask Ss to work in pairs and carry out the interview to fill in



the form. one S asks and the other answers.



- If time allowed, all on some pairs to act out the interview in


front of the class.




Pair work



3'

<b>wrapping</b>


- Summarize the main points.


- Assign homework.



Whole class



<b> Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: 5th<sub> September, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 11</b>



<b>unit 2- period 5- language focus</b>


<b> I . Aim</b>


Revision of the sound / A / and / a : /


Using gerund and to-infinitive



<b>II . Objectives</b>



By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:



- Pronounce the vowels / A / and / a: / correctly


- Distinguish the use of gerund and to-infinitive.



<b>III . Materials</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<b> IV . Procedure</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


5'

<b>warm-up</b>


<b>Jumbled words</b>


-

Divide the class into small groups.



- Give each group one card containing 10 words whose letters


are jumbled.



- Ask Ss to rearrange the letter to make good words.



- The group which finishes the task first with the most correct


words will be the winner.



<b>E.g.</b>


<i>1. bsutcej => subject</i>
<i>2. skat => task</i>
<i>3. lmeeaf => female</i>


<i>4. ctarfif => traffic</i>


Group work



5'

<b>Pronunciation</b>


<b>presentation 1</b>


- Demonstrate the sounds /A/ and /a:/ by pronouncing them


clearly and slowly.



Help Ss to distinguish these two sounds.


Instruct the way to pronounce:



+ /A/ : first practice the sound / .../ then put your tongue back a little.


+ /A/ is very short sound.



+ /a:/ first pronounce the sound / a:/ the put your tongue down


and back.



+ /a:/ is a long sound.



Whole class



5'

<b>practice 1</b>


- Play the tape and ask them to repeat.



- Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to in front of the


class.




- Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.


Introduce peer correction.



- Go a round the class and provide help if necessary.



Pair work



7'

<b>grammar and vocabulary</b>


<b>presentation and practice 2</b>


-Keep ss in pair and ask them to make question for the responses.



-

<i><b>Note</b></i>

: This is an easy activity so it can be carried out in a



short time. There will be various acceptable questions.



call on some pair to read the question and responses aloud in


front of the class.



<i><b>Give suggested answers:</b></i>


<i>1. when did you come back from ho chi minh city?</i>
<i>2. how long did you stay there?</i>


<i>3. who did you come with?</i>
<i>4. where did you live?</i>


<i>5. why do you learn English?</i>


<i>6. What time is it?</i>


<i>7. How many children have they got?</i>


Pair work



10'



<b>presentation 3</b>
<b>Distinguish the infinitive and -ing form</b>


The base form of a verb often function as an infinitive. In is called
the <b>bare infinitive</b> because it is used without <b>to</b>. we must
distinguish it from the <b>to-infinitive</b>. where <b>to</b> is always used in front
of the base form of the verb. The <b>-ing</b> form of a verb sometimes
function as <b>a gerund </b>( a kind of noun) and sometimes as a present


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

participle. Many verbs and adjectives, and in some cases by more
than one form. Form the student's point of view, the problem is
knowing which form is appropriate. this may be because only one
form is grammatically correct, e.g: enjoy doing or fail to do. Or it
may be because only one form suits what we want to say, e.g:
remember to do or remember doing.


The following list are the verbs which can only followed by <b></b>
<b>to-infinitive</b> and <b>-ing:</b>


The verbs can only be followed by <i>to-infinitive:</i>


<i>agree plan </i>


<i> refuse hope</i>
<i> manage expect </i>
<i> fail seem </i>
<i> decide tend</i>


...


7'



<b>practice 3</b>


- Ask ss to read the letter carefully and fill in each blank with


an -ing and to-infinitive form of the verb in brackets.



- Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend.


- Call on some Ss to read the completed letter.


- Make necessary corrections.



- Give correct answers:



<i>Dear Lisa,</i>


<i> I expected(1) to hear from you. I hope you are Ok. I bury but happy.</i>
<i> Last night I went to a party at one of my classmates' home. I was really</i>
<i>nervous. You know how I usually avoid (2)going to parties because I have</i>
<i>trouble (3) remembering people's names. Well, last night things were</i>
<i>different. Before the party, I read a book about improving your memory, I</i>
<i>practice (4) doing some of the memory exercises. They really helped. As a</i>
<i>result, I stopped (5) worrying about what people would think of me, and I</i>
<i>tried (6) to pay attention to what people were saying. And guess what? I</i>


<i>had a good time! I'm even planning (7) to go dancing with this guy from</i>
<i>my class.</i>


<i> Why don't you consider ( 8 ) visiting me ? I really miss ( 9 ) seeing you.</i>
<i>please write I always enjoy ( 10 ) hearing from you.</i>


<i>Best wishes,</i>
<i>Sonia</i>


Individual


work



6'



<b>practice 4</b>


-

Further practice with- ing and to- infinitive form.



- Ask ss to work in pairs and complete the sentences using

<i></i>



<i>an-ing or to-infinitive form of the verb in the box.</i>



- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.


- Feedback and give correct answer:



<i>1. It was a nice day, so we decided to go for s walk.</i>
<i>2. I'm not in a hurry, I don't mind waiting.</i>


<i>3. They were hurry, so she suggested having dinner early.</i>
<i>4. I'm still looking for a jib, but I hope to find something soon.</i>


<i>5. we must do something. We can't go on living like this.</i>


<i>7.Our neighbour threatened to call the police if we didn't stop the noise.</i>
<i>8. Lan was in a difficult situation, so I agreed to lend her some money.</i>
<i>9. suddenly everybody stopped talking.</i>


<i>10. Don't forget to post the letter I gave you.</i>


Pair work



wrapping


Summarize the main points.


Assign homework.



Whole class



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>



<b>Date of preparing: 7th<sub> September, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Unit 3- people’s background</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, and skimming for


general information



- Improve background knowledge about famous scientists especially about Marie Curie.



- Talk about their own background and know how to ask the other people ‘s background.


- Develop such listening micro- skills to talk about one of the Olympic champions by using


the information regarding her background and her career.



- Write a simple V.C



- Get to know the format, layout and essential information or a V.C.


- Distinguish the sounds / e /, / /



- Pronounce the words and sentences containing the sounds correctly.



- Use the past perfect tense appropriately and distinguish it with the past simple tense.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b>

Picture, tape, cassette, text book ...





<b>III. Division of the unit:</b>


<b>-</b>

Period 12: reading



<b>-</b>

Period 13: speaking



<b>-</b>

Period 14: listening



<b>-</b>

Period 15: writing



<b>-</b>

Period 16: language focus




<b>Date of preparing: September 7th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 12</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Sts will be able to:



<b>-</b>

Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, and



skimming for general information



<b>-</b>

Improve background knowledge about famous scientists especially



about Marie Curie.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b>

Textbook , handout ,

.



<b>III. Organization</b>:


<b>II.</b>

Procedure:



<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


8’



Warm- up


<b>Brainstorming:</b>



-Ask them to make a list of famous scientists…



- Write them in your posters, After 4 minutes the group with the


longest list will be the winner.



- T corrects the wrong words



- T asks further questions about some scientists regarding their


specializations and achievements.



Leonard de Vinci





Marie Curie


Group work



10’

<b>1. Look at the picture</b> :Pre- reading


- Sts try to make scene of the picture on page 32, 33.


- Answer the T’s questions:



1. Do you know who she is?


2. what do you know about her?



………

..




- T checks with the class and asks Sts to guess what they are


going to read about.



<b>KEY:</b><i>1. She is Marie Curie.</i>


<i> 2. She is the famous French scientist</i>




2. <b>Vocabulary:</b>


<i>- scientist: (n ) nhµ khoa häc</i>


<i>- scientific : ( adj) thc vỊ khoa häc</i>
<i>- brilliant : ( adj) th«ng minh, sáng dạ</i>
<i>- Mature : ( adj) trởng thành</i>


<i>- private tutor : ( n) gia s</i>
<i>- flying colours: ( n) bằng đỏ</i>


<i>- PhD: Doctor of Philosophy: tiÕn sÜ</i>
<i>- tragic : (adj) thê thảm, </i>


<i>- Atomic weight of radium: tang lợng nguyên tử</i>
<i>- determine ( v) </i>


<i>- ease : (v) làm dịu ®i</i>


<i>- humanitarian : ( n) nhân đạo</i>



-

Read after the teacher, tress,



-

T calls some Sts to read the words aloud.



-

T repeats the words if the Sts don’t read correctly.



Individual


work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

-

Using drop out and remember method to check.



-

T gives feedback.



5’

While- reading


<b>1. Task 1( 33 ): </b>


<b> Matching the words or phrases in A with their meaning in B:</b>

- Divide the class into 2 groups.



- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.


- T gets Sts to match the sentences.



- Ask each st in each group to go to the board as fast as he/ she


can to writes one sentence then come to the seat. The others



continue

The fastest and most correct in the winner.



- T gives corrective feedback.


<b>KEY:</b>


<i>1. c 2. e 3. a 4. d 5. b</i>


Group work



8’



<b>2. Task 2: ( 33 )</b>


-

Sts read the text again then read the sentences in task 2



before choosing T/ F statements.



-

Sts check the answers with their friends.



-

T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers



-

T gives feedback and correct answers.



<b>KEY: </b>


1. T 2. F ( Her dream was to become a scientist)
3. T 4. F ( in 1894) 5. F ( in France)


Individual


work and


whole class



12’

Post- reading





-

Retell all the class about Marie Curie.



-

T goes around to check and offer help.



-

Sts share your group’ s opinions with the others.



-

T calls on the groups to tell their passages.



-

T gives corrective feedback.



<b>Key:</b>


Marie Curie was a French scientist. She was born on November 7th


1867 in Warsaw. When she was a child, she was mature and brilliant
student in local school. She wanted to go abroad to study so she
worked as a private tutor to save money for her dream.


In 1891, she went to Paris to realize her dream at the Sorbonne. She
earn a degree in Physics with flying corlours, and a degree in Maths. In
1894, she met Pierre in the school of Physics and a year later, they got
married. In 1903, she was the 1st<sub> woman to receive a PhD from the</sub>


Sorbonne. In 1906, her husband died, she took up his position in
Sorbonne. Then she was the 1st<sub> woman in France to be a university</sub>


professor. She was awarded a Nobel Prize in Chemistry for determining
the atomic weight of radium. But her real joy was “ easing human


suffering” . In 1914. she founded the Radium Institute.


Group work



2’

Homework


-

T summarizes the main points of the lesson.



-

T asks Sts to do task 3 on page 34.



<b>Key</b>:


<i>1. She was born on November 7th<sub> 1867 in Warsaw.</sub></i>


<i>2. She was mature and brilliant student in local school.</i>


<i>3. She worked as a private tutor to save money for a study tour abroad.</i>
<i>4. She was awarded a Nobel Prize in Chemistry for determining the</i>


<i>atomic weight of radium.</i>


<i>5. No, she wasn t. Her real joy was easing human suffering</i>’ “ ”




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

………
………
………


<b>Date of preparing: September 13th<sub> 2008</sub></b>



<b>Period 13</b>



Unit 3- Lesson 2- speaking


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:



- talk about deference kinds of activities to volunteer work.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


-

Picture, text book, handout

.



<b>III. Organization</b>:


<b> </b>


<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


7’

Warm- up


-

Ask sts to retell about Marie Curie



- Listen then check their work in front of the class.


- T gives them marks.



- T gives more ideas if necessary.




Whole class



7’

<b>1. Task 1: What questions do you use to ask about somebody s</b>Pre- Speaking ’


<b>back ground:</b>


- T asks Sts to work in group to decide what questions they


can use to ask about people’s background.



- T walks around to explain new words if necessary.



- T calls some sts to give their questions and ask for


comments from other sts.



<b>Example: </b>


<i>1. What is your name?</i>


<i>2. When and where were you born?</i>
<i>3. Where do you live now?</i>


<i>4. What is your telephone number?</i>
<i>5. What and where does your father do?</i>
<i>6. What and where does your mother do?</i>
<i>7. How many brothers or sisters have you got?</i>


<i>8. What is the name of the primary/ secondary school did you</i>
<i>study in?</i>


<i>9. What subject do you like best? Why?</i>


<i>10. What do you like?</i>


<i>11. What do you dislike?</i>
<i>12. How do you go to school?</i>


<i>13. What date do you like to start? Why?</i>


. ..


……… …………


Group work


and



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

10’

<b>Task 2 ( 35)</b> While speaking


- Ask they to work in pair to ask and answer the questions


that they have found.



- Sts work as interviewers walk around to interview the


other Sts in the class.



- T calls on some pairs to read out his/ her answers


- T checks with the class and gives corrective feedback.



Whole class


and


pair work



10’




Post speaking


-

Sts prepare to talk about the Sts they have just interview.



-

T goes around to check and offer help.



-

T calls some Sts to talk about their topic in front of the class.



-

T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.



<b>Example</b>:


<i>Mai was born on April 20th<sub> 1992 at a small house in Song Khoai.</sub></i>
<i>She live with her parents and 2 other sisters in Dai Yen now. Her</i>
<i>father works as an engineer in Uong Bi power station. And her</i>
<i>mother is a farmer, she usually works hard in the field to earn money</i>
<i>for their study. From 1998 to May 2004 she was the good student at</i>
<i>Song Khoai primary school. And then her family moved to Dai Yen</i>
<i>and she spent her time to study at Dai Yen secondary school. </i>


<i>Everyday she ride her bike about 10 kilometres to school. She</i>
<i>likes learning English because it is an international language. She</i>
<i>loves her teachers and her friends very much. She usually spends her</i>
<i>free time to visit her friends or to stay at home to do her homework.</i>
<i>Sometimes she go fishing or swimming at The Old Man Pool.</i>


<i>.</i>
<i>………</i>



Group work



3’



Wrapping up and Homework


-

T summarises the main points of the lesson.



- Write your group topic that you have talked in the



Post speaking

part .



Whole class





Self- evaluation:


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: September 17th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 14</b>



<b>Unit 3- Lesson 3- listening</b>




<b>A.OBJECTIVE:</b>


I-Knowledge:

Helping students to listen for specific information about



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>B.PROCEDUCE:</b>


I-Settlement:

Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.



II-Checking: Asking 2 students to make an interview about background


III- New lesson:



<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>WARMER: </b>


<b>Answering Questions</b>



-T gives a picture about Olympic Champions


and asks Ss to work in pairs and talk about them.


Suggest the questions:



<i>+What do you know about Olympic ?</i>


<i>(When did the Olympic start ? </i>



<i>How often is it held ?)</i>



<i>+ Do you know any Olympic Champions ?</i>


<i>+Can you name any Olympic Champions?</i>



<i>+ What would you like to know about these people?</i>



<b>PRE- LISTENING</b>


<b>Activity 1:Presenting Vocabulary</b>


+Olympic Champion



+ sports teacher: a teacher who teaches sports


+ Diploma(n)



+ romantic (adj)


+ Degree:



+ Certificate:



<b>Activity 2:Listening and repeating</b>


<b>WHILE -LISTENING</b>
<b>TASK 1:TRUE Or FALSE</b>


-T asks Ss to listen to the conversation between


Bob and Sally. Decide whether the statements


are true or false.



-Before listening to the tape, T asks Ss to read all


statements and understand clearly.



- Encourage Ss to guess the statements if they


are T or F



-Play the tape several times if necessary


-Have Ss compare their answer with a friend


- Call on some Ss to explain their answers in



front of the class.



-Feedback and give correct answers:



<b>TASK 2:GAP- FILLING</b>


-Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and try to


guess the missing words in the blanks.



- Ask Ss to listen to the conversation again and


fill the blanks.



- Play the tape once



- Feedback and give correct answers:



<b>POST-LISTENING</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs :Ask and answer about Sally


<i><b>Suggested questions</b></i>

:



1.Who is sally?



2.When was She born?



The whole class answer T’s questions



Listen to T’s eliciting and copy down



Listen and repeat these words



-Work individually



-Read all statements and guess them



Listen to tape and give answers


- Expected answer:



1.T


2T



3F( I don’t have much free time)


4T



5F( I want to be a sports teacher)


-Work individually and then compare


their answers with a partner.



-Expected answer:


1.general education


2.lives - family



3.different - swimming


4.loves stories



5.teacher’s diploma.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

3.What has she got at local school?


4.What did she do when she was 15?


5.Where is her house?




6.How many members are there in her family ?


who are they?



7.What does she like in her family?



-Role- play :Ask and Answer about


Sally.



<b>IV-Consolidation:- Report something what you have listened about Sally </b>
<b>V-Homework</b>

- Write a short passage about Sally in 50 minutes



- Prepare Unit 3: lesson 4: WRITING


<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: September 22nd<sub>, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 15</b>



<b>Unit 3 - Lesson 4- WRITING</b>


<b>A. OBJECTIVE.</b>


I-Knowledge:

Helping students to write a CV about people’s background.



II-Skill : Writing skill



<b>B. PROCEDUCE.</b>


I-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students’ attendance.



II-Checking: Asking 2 students to make an interview about Sally’s background


III- New lesson:



<i><b>Teacher s activities</b></i>’ <i><b>Students activities</b></i>’


<b>WARMER:</b>

<b>Matching</b>



-T asks Ss to close their textbook and match


the items in A with the information in B



<b>A</b>

<b>B</b>



<i>1.Name</i>


<i>2.Date of birth</i>
<i>3.Place of birth</i>
<i>4.School attended</i>
<i>5.Exams passed</i>
<i>6.Previous jobs</i>
<i>7.Interests</i>


<i>a. Boston</i>


<i>b. Kengsinton High school</i>
<i>c.English, Maths, French</i>


<i>d.Tourist guide</i>


<i>e.David Brown</i>
<i>f.12/11/86</i>


<i>g.Music and dancing</i>


-T checks and asks Ss where these


information are listed.



<b> Somebody s background</b>


<b>PRESENTATION</b>


<b>TASK 1: How to write somebody s background</b>


-T explains the elements of a C.V by asking



Work in groups and match the items in


A with their information in B



Expected answer:


1e



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

Ss to read Mr. Brown’s C.V



C.V: curriculum vitae -a form with details


<i>about somebody s past education and</i>


<i>jobs:b¶n khai sinh</i>



C.V normally consists of following items


Personal information/data:




<i> Education:</i>


<i> Previous jobs:</i>


<i> Interests:</i>



-T asks Ss to work independently and write


a paragraph about Mr. Brown, using the


cues below.



Be born...like...go to...school...


from ...to...pass exams in...travel


agency...work as.



-Have Ss compare their writing with a friend.


<b>PRACTICE:</b>


<b>TASK 2:</b>


-T asks Ss to work in pairs and ask the partner


for the information about his/her parents and


complete the form.



- Go around the class and provide help by


giving suggested Qs



*Education: which school did you go to ?


when?



* Exams: which exams did you pass? When?


*Hobby: what’s your hobby ? what do you do



in your free time?



* Sports: Do you like play sports? What


sports do you like playing?



* Job: What did you work ? when?



- Call 2 students to go the blackboard and


write their writing



- Peer correction



<b>PRODUCTION</b>
<b>TASK 3</b>


Write a paragraph about your partner’s


parents. Then ask him/her to read the


paragraph and check whether the information


is correct.



Give correct answer:



<i>Mr. Brown was born on 12th<sub> November,</sub></i>


<i>1969 in Boston. He went to Kensington</i>
<i>High school and passed exams in English,</i>
<i>French, and Mathematics. He worked in a</i>
<i>travel agency from June 1991 to December</i>
<i>1998. And from 1999 to 2002, he worked</i>
<i>as a hotel telephonist. He likes music and</i>


<i>dancing</i>.


Work in pairs



- Complete the information in a form


- Go to the blackboard and write them



Name

Mr./Ms



Date of birth


Place of birth


<b>Education:</b>


School attended


Exams passed:



<b>Previous job:</b>

Date from/ date


to



Work individually



IV-Consolidation:- Write a somebody’s background


What sort of information to write?




V-Homework : - Complete your writing



- Prepare Unit 3- lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS.


<b>Self- evaluation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>Date of preparing: September 24th<sub> 2008</sub></b>



<b>Period 16</b>



<b>Unit 3 - Lesson 5- LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


1. Educational aim: students can distinguish and pronounce two vowels /e/ and



/

/, know how to use the simple past tense and past perfect tense when tell about



activities in the past


2. Knowledge:



a. General knowledge:



b. Language: Through this unit students know how to pronounce two vowels/e/



and /

/ exactly



Words contain /e/ and /

/



Revise the usage and form of the past perfect tense


3. Skills:



<b>II. Method</b>: integrated mainly communicative
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b> Some handouts


<b>IV. Procedures:</b>


<i><b>Teacher's activities</b></i> <i><b>Students activities</b></i>’



<b>Warm-up</b>


- Asks students to put the words into the correct


order to make a complete sentence



can/can/canner/can't/ a/can/he?



-Asks students to read the sentence aloud


- Introduces the content of the lesson



<b>Pronunciation</b>


- Explains the way to pronounce two /e/ and /

/



- Teacher reads



- Reads the following words



- Asks students to find out the words which



contain /e/ and the words which contain/

/ in



the sentences



- Asks students to work in group find out more



words

which contain

/e/ and the words which



contain/

/




<b>Grammar</b>


- Asks students to look at the example in the


text book and answer the question:



In what tenses are verbs in the sentences put?


Why?



- Asks students to repeat the usage and form of


the past tense and past perfect tense



- Asks students to do the exercise 1 :



<i><b>Use the verbs in brackets in the past perfect</b></i>



- Students work in pairs


* Answers



A canner can't can a can, can he?


- Read aloud the sentence



- Listen



- students read after the teacher


- listen and repeat



- Read and find out in groups


- Work in groups




- Student answer



- Students answer



-Students do the exercise 1


individually



* Answers



<i>1. had broken</i>
<i>2. had done</i>
<i>3.had met</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

- Teacher checks the answers



- Ask students to do the exercise 2:



* Put the verbs in brackets in the past simple or


<i>the past perfect</i>



- Teacher checks the answers



- Ask students to do the exercise 3:



Find the mistakes in the following sentences


then correct them



<b>Homework </b>


Ask students to do the test yourself A




<i>7. had left</i>
<i>8. had moved</i>
<i>9. had not seen</i>
<i>10.had broken in</i>


- Students work individually then


check the answer with the partner


* Answers



<i>1.had just finished -came</i>


<i>2.had seldom travelled-went</i>


<i>3.went- had already taken</i>



<i>4.did you manage-had...gone-got</i>


<i>5.had just got-phoned-was</i>



- Students do the exercise


individually then check the answers


with the partner



* Answers


<i>1.climed</i>


<i>2.turned</i>


<i>3.called</i>


<i>4.heard</i>



<i>5had already gone</i>



<b>Self- evaluation:</b>



...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: September 27th<sub> 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 17</b>



<b>Test yourself A</b>


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: people’s daily routines, school talks,


people's background, .



- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


-

Handout, text book

.



<b>III. Organization:</b>
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b><sub>arrangement</sub>Work</b>


13


minutes



<b>Listening</b>



- Sts read through the listening part then listen to the tape


about the test.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

- T plays the tape again then checks the answers with the class.


- Give final feedback.



<b>KEY:</b> 1<i>. 15th January 1992 2. In 1951</i>
<i> 3. for 4 years 4. he met</i>


<i> 5. they got married 6. a minister at a</i>
<i> 7. the black freedom movement 8. heard his speech at </i>
<i>the</i>


<i>9. in 1964 10. 4th April 1968</i>


13


minutes



<b>Reading </b>


-

Sts read the passage then choose the correct information follow.



- Sts check the answers with the partners



- T checks and give corrections in front of the class.


<b>KEY</b>:


1. F 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. B


Individual



work


and


pair work



13


minutes



<b>Pronunciation and grammar</b>


Sts complete the sentences , using the right forms of the infinitive.


- T goes around to check their answers.



- T asks Sts to share their answers with the partners.


- T gives the final answers key.



<b>KEY</b>: 1. to apply 2. am 3. attended
4. passed 5. got 6. can
7. reading 8. know 9. am able
10. hearing


Individual


work


and


pair work



6


minutes



<b>Writing</b>

- Sts do the part at home.




- T gives them the form of a writing about the reply.



- Sts use the questions in their books to make the plan of the writing.


- Sts may ask the teacher more information or structures


before writing.



<b>For example</b>:


120 Ly Tu Trong street,
Mong Cai, Quang Ninh
20th November 2008
<i>Dear Sally,</i>


<i>I am very happy to be your pen friend. I am sixteen years old. I am</i>
<i>1.65 meters tall. I have got long black hair and black eyes. I live near</i>
<i>Quang Ninh college of education with my family.</i>


<i>I am a student at Tran Phu high school. It is a big and new school in</i>
<i>Hung Vuong Street. There are about one thousand students and </i>
<i>thirty-three teachers in my school. I study many subjects such as English,</i>
<i>Chemistry, Physics, Maths, History and so on. I like E most because I</i>
<i>like E songs. I go to school with Mai every morning and I study 5</i>
<i>periods from 7.00 to 11.15. After that I come back home, have lunch,</i>
<i>do my homework then help my parents with the housework.</i>


<i> I hope that you will write to me soon.</i>


<i>Give my best wishes to your parents and two sisters.</i>
<i> Love, </i>



<i>Thinh</i>


Whole class



Self- evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing: October 2nd<sub>, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 18</b>



<b>The first written test</b>
<b>(45 minutes)</b>


<b>I. Aims of the test:</b>


- Checking the Sts’ understanding about 3 topics: people’s daily routines, school


talks, people's background .



- Checking the Sts how to use the grammar : present tenses and past tenses.


- Checking the vocabularies, structures, and pronunciation.



<b>II. Organization:</b>

<b>10A1: </b>

...


<b>10A7:</b>

...


<b>Tran Phu High School</b>


Class 10A...


Name: ...


<b>Test of English</b><sub> (N</sub>o<sub> 1)</sub>


Time:<b> 45</b> minutes


<b>Mark </b> <b>Teacher’s comments </b>


<i><b>* Chú ý</b>: Học sinh <b>không</b> dùng từ điển hoặc tài liệu liên quan đến Tiếng Anh./.</i>


<i><b>Choose the word with the different pronunciation of the underlined part.</b></i>


1. A. stays B. says C. days D. plays


2. A. come B. computer C. some D. comfortable


3. A. account B. enough C. found D. thousand


4. A. brilliant B. live C. life D. determine


<i><b>Choose the best answer</b></i>


<i><b>1. When her children are at school, Mrs. Smith does her usual</b>...</i>



A. way B. homework C. routines D. vacation


<i><b>2. She lives near me and I speak to her everyday on my </b>...<b>to work.</b></i>


A. street B. road C. way D. travel


<i><b>3. My mother often</b>...<b>for a walk with her friends in the park after dinner.</b></i>


A. takes B. has C. goes D. wants


<i><b>4. In spite of her protest, her father </b>...<b>her train for the race two hours a day.</b></i>


A. let B. caused C. insisted D. made


<i><b>5. We drove around the city center for an hour looking a parking</b>...</i>


A. area B. space C. house D. stop


<i><b>6. The teacher</b>...<b>.the students the solution to the problem.</b></i>


A. told B. said C. discussed D. explained


<i><b>7. His parents don t </b></i>’ <i>...<b>of his having parties every week.</b></i>


A. agree B. support C. approve D. arrive


<i><b>8. We can see many</b>...<b>of corn in the village.</b></i>


A. farms B. lands C. places D. fields



<i><b>9. The success of the </b>...<b>depends on the weather.</b></i>


A. bridge B. neighbour C. crop D. buffalo


<i><b>10. His parents are </b>...<b>with his good results in Civic Education.</b></i>


A. interested B. contented C. excited D. worried


<i><b>11. They </b>...<b>.to me since they moved to Halong city.</b></i>


A. hasn’t written B. didn’t write C. haven’t written D. don’t write


<i><b>12. We are really looking forward </b>...<b>you again.</b></i>


A. to seeing B. to see C. seeing D. see


<i><b>Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

 Do you ...
2. The last time I met Johnson was 3 years ago.


 I haven’t ...
3. I ride bicycle to school in twenty minutes.


 It takes ...
4. James can swim farther than Daisy.


 Daisy can’t ...



Fill each gap in the letter with one word from the box.



A. news B. letter C. moon D. people E. weekend


F. birthday G. picnic H. wood I. able J. noise


Thank you very much for your (1)..., which arrived this morning. It was really my
turn to write, as you say, but I seem to have so little (2)...these days. I mean, life goes on as
always, and nothing special seems to happen. Last (3)...was fun, though. As you may remember,
it’s Daisy’s (4)...last Saturday, and she wanted to do something different. Instead of the
usual party at home, she decided to have a midnight(5)... in Glover Wood. We all met at a
cafeteria, had a few drinks and then went on down to the (6)... . Fortunately, there was a bright
(7)..., so we were (8)... to make way there without much trouble.


<i><b>Read the passage below and then choose the correct answer A, B, C or D.</b></i>


Jack London was the famous American novelist and short story writer. He was born in San
Francisco in 1876. He quit school at fourteen to become a sailor. He was a self-taught student, he finished
his high school and college education during six months. He led an adventurous but poor life. His view
point was in favour of the poor and socialism. He read a lot of books of Karl Marx. He was influenced by
Marxist Party theory and the October Revolution. In 1885, he joined the Socialist Labour Party but in the
last years of his life, he moved away from the working class and in 1916 he left the party. In 1916, he
committed suicide because of despair dream. He used an overdose of morphine and drowned himself in
the sea. He was an adventure novelist, a socialist reformer and a prominent socialist who often signed
under the line “Yours for the revolution, Jack London”


<i><b>1. Jack London quit school in</b>……</i>


A. 1876 B. 1890 C. 1895 D. 1916
<i><b>2. He had a/an</b>…...…<b> life.</b></i>



A. rich and adventurous B. poor and quiet
C. adventurous and poor D. rich and quiet
<i><b>3. He was in favour of </b>……</i>


A. self teaching B. capitalism


C. the rich and the poor D. the poor and socialism
<i><b>4. Why did he commit suicide?</b></i>


A. Because he left the party.
B. He used to have a dream.
C. Because of socialism.


D. Because of despair of life and disillusion with American dream.
<i><b>5. Jack London died at the age of </b>……</i>


A. 39 B. 40 C. 41 D. 42


<i><b>Listen to the talk about Alexandre Yersin carefully and fill in the gaps.</b></i>


Alexandre Yersin was born in (1)...in Switzerland. In 1882, he received a
baccalaureate degree in (2)..., and in 1888, after having graduated from a medical
(3)...in Paris, he formally changed his citizenship to French. He joined Dr. Louis
Pasteur’s team at about the same (4)... . Thereafter, he became (5)...through
much of the pioneering work done by Pasteur’s team. His wanderlust brought him to
(6)... . In July 1891, his expedition to the highlands of Vietnam led to the discovery of
Da Lat, and (7)... later discoveries of (8)...sources in this region.


Self- evaluation:



...
...


...


<b>Date of preparing: 3rd<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 19</b>



<b>unit 4 - special education</b>
<b>lesson 1 - reading</b>
<b>I. Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the term special education


and talk about it through Matching and Multiple Choice exercises



<b>II. Materials</b>:


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>IV. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


10’

<b>warm - up</b>


<b>Brainstorming</b>



Ask Ss to work in groups and make a list of the activities



that blind and deaf people would have difficulty doing.


Gather ideas and introduce the topic of the lesson.


Give definition of special education and Braille :



<i> Special education refers to the teaching of students with</i>


<i>a learning disability, a developmental disability or a</i>


<i>behavioral problem. Thus, this education is specially</i>


<i>aimed at the blind and deaf students or the students who</i>


<i>are slow at learning or the students who have other</i>


<i>learning difficulties.</i>



<i> Braille is a system of raised dots representing the letters</i>


<i>of the alphabet, punctuation and numbers, based on the</i>


<i>six patterns of device, which enables blind people to read</i>


<i>by touching and to write by using an embosser. It was</i>


<i>blinded in a childhood accident. At the age of 15 he</i>


<i>modified a military system for reading orders at night</i>


<i>without showing any light ( night writing)</i>



Ask Ss to work in pairs : Look at the Braille Alphabet in


the book and work out the message that follows.



Note : This activity can be interesting because Ss have to


transfer the raised



dots in Braille Alphabet to English Alphabet .



Ask Ss to compare their answers with another pairs.


Feedback and give correct answers :




We Are The World


Whole class



7



Before you read


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>disabled(a) : tàn tật</i>
<i>dumb (a) : câm</i>


<i>proper schooling (n) : học hành đầy đủ</i>
<i>opposition (n) : ý kin phn i</i>


<i>make effort (v) : nỗ lực cố gắng</i>
<i>to be proud (a) tù hµo</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Rub out and remember</b></i>


Write all the new words on the board in two columns


:English and Vietnamese equivalence.



Rob out the words in English column and ask Ss to look


at the Vietnamese column to write down the rubbed ones.



Whole class




8’



<b>While you read</b>
<b>Task 1 - Matching</b>


Ask Ss to read the passage individually and do Task 1 :


The words in A appear in the reading passage. Match them


with their definition in B.



Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of the words in the


context.



Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend.



Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of


the class.



Give correct answers and explain all the words carefully



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

7’



to make sure Ss understand the meaning of the words :



1<i>. disabled- c. unable to use a part of the body in the normal way.</i>
<i>2. mentally retarded - e. less mentally developed than normal.</i>
<i>3. time-consuming - a. taking or needing a lot of time.</i>


<i>4. demonstration - b . an act of showing or explaining</i>


<i> how to do something.</i>


<i>5. gradually - d. slowly, over a long period of time.</i>


<b>Task 2 - Multiple Choice</b>


Tell Ss to read the passage again more carefully and


complete the sentences by circling the corresponding letter


A, B, C or D.



Ask Ss to give explanation for their choice.


Feedback and give correct answers :



1. D 2 . B 3. A 4. c 5. D

Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud in front of the class.


Make necessary corrections regarding Ss' pronunciation


and intonation.



Give explanation to other words and expressions in the passage.



Individual


work



10’



<b>after you read</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs and read the summary of the


passage carefully.



Encourage Ss to guess the missing words.


Have Ss complete the summary in pairs.




<i>Note : Ss may not be familiar with this kind of exercise. T </i>


should provide help when necessary.



Call on some Ss to read the completed summary aloud in


front of the class.



Feedback and give correct answers:



1 - disabled children have 2. read
3 . write 4 . efforts


5 . opposition 6. time - consuming
7 . maths 8 . arms


9. fingers 10 . proud


Pair work



3’



<b>Wrapping up and homework.</b>

Summaries the main points.



Assign homework.

Whole class



self - evaluation :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>Date of preparing : 4th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>



<b>Period 20</b>



<b>unit 4 - lesson 2 - speaking</b>
<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :


- talk about school life a student.



- actively engage in an interview.


<b>II. Materials.</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers...


<b>III. Organization.</b>


<b>IV. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


10’



<b>warm - up</b>

<b>* Networks</b>



Ask Ss to work in groups and make a list of words relating to school.


The group with the longest list will be the winner.



<b>Note : The words must be correctly spelled and related to the topic.</b>


Suggested and answers :



<i>Subjects</i>




<i>( English, Literature...)</i>


<i>Texts</i>



<i> (oral, final, mid - term...)</i>


<i>Break</i>



<i>Homework</i>


<i>Teacher</i>


<i>Secondary</i>



<i>(lower and upper secondary)</i>


<i>... </i>



Group work



7’



<b>presentation</b>


Have Ss study the questions in the interview carefully.


Ask Ss to work individually and fill in the blanks with the


right questions.



Give Ss tips by asking them to read the answers before


deciding the best question in the blanks.



Call on some Ss to explain their answers.


Give correct answers:




A.4 Which lower-secondary school did you go to?


<i> B.1 What were your subjects then?</i>



<i> C.2 What were your timetable ?</i>



<i> D.6 Can you tell me about the tests and examinations at </i>


<i>your school then ?</i>



<i> E.3 What about homework ?</i>



<i> F.5 What part of the school life didn't you like then ?</i>


<i> G.7 What did you like best about your school then ?</i>



Individual


work



15’



<b>practice</b>


Ask Ss to work in pair and carry out the interview, using the


question in Task 1.



<b>Note : Ss are suggested to use his/ her own information to</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

answers the questions. However, they may use the answers in


the book as samples.



Go around the class and provide help if necessary.




10’

<b>production</b>


Call on some Ss to use the information in the interview to


make a mini-presentation about his/ her partner.



Tell the whole class to comment on presenters' performance.


Make necessary corrections.



Individual


work and


Whole class



3’

<b>Wrapping up and homework</b>


Summaries the main points.


Assign homework.



Whole class



self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 5th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 21</b>




<b>unit 4 - lesson 3 - listening</b>


<b>I. Objectives</b>.


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen better through True or False and


Gap-filling exercises



<b>II. Materials.</b>


Textbook, cassette,....


<b>III. Organization</b>.
<b>IV. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


7’



warm - up


<b>Word form</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups of three to four and find the different



words that derive from the following roots :

Group



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<i>sorry</i>
<i>second:</i>
<i>decide :</i>
<i>able :</i>


The group with the longest list of correct words will be the winner.



<b>Note : Encourage Ss to find the words they have learned.</b>


Suggested answers :



<i>sorry - sorrow, sorrily...</i>


<i>second - secondary, secondly, secondhand...</i>
<i>decide - decision, decisive, decisively,....</i>
<i>able - disabled, disability, ...</i>


10’



Before you listen


Explain the meaning of the words in the box.



<i>photograph (n) : bøc ¶nh, tÊm ¶nh</i>


<i>photographer (n) : ngêi chơp ¶nh, nhiếp ảnh</i>


<i>photography (n) : môn nhiếp ảnh, nghệ thuật nhiếp ảnh.</i>
<i>photogenic (a) : ăn ảnh</i>


<i>photographic (a) : thuộc về nhiếp ¶nh.</i>


Ask Ss to work in pairs and fill each of the blanks with one


word from the box.



Call on some ss read the answers aloud in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers :




1. <i>photographic</i>


<i>2. photography</i>
<i>3. photographer</i>
<i>4. photograph</i>
<i>5. photogenic</i>


<b>Vocabulary Pre-teach</b>



<i>surroundings (n) :môi trờng xung quanh</i>
<i>sorrow (n) : nỗi buồn</i>


<i>passion (n) : niềm đam mê</i>
<i>labourer (n) : ngời lao động </i>
<i>deaf (a) : điếc</i>


<i>mute (a) : c©m</i>


<i>exhibition (n) : triĨn l·m</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Sentence Modeling</b></i>


Ask Ss to make sentences with the above words.



Make sure Ss understand the meaning and the use of these words.



Whole


class




Individual


work



8’



10’



while you listen


<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You are going to listen to a talk about a club for disabled children.</i>
<i>You listen to it and do the tasks followed.</i>


<b>Task 1</b> <i><b>- True or False</b></i>


Let Ss read the statements carefully.



Ask Ss to listen to the tape and decide whether the statements


are true or false.



Play the tape more than once if necessary.


Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend.


Check the answers as the whole class.



Give correct answers :



<b>1 . T 2 . F 3 . T 4 . F 5 . T</b>
<b>Task 2 - </b><i><b>Gap - filling</b></i>



Ask Ss to read a part of the talk carefully and have a guess of


the missing words.



Have Ss listen to the tape and write in each blank with a


suitable word.



Call on some Ss to read the answers aloud in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers.:



<i>1. photographic 2. 19</i>
<i>3. exhibition 4. 50</i>


Individual


work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<i>5. beauty 6. simple</i>
<i>7. peaceful 8. chickens</i>
<i>9. stimulated 10. escape</i>


<b>Tape script.</b>


<i> If you ask any member of the Vang Trang Khuyet Club which time</i>


<i>of the day they enjoy most, and they will all agree : their</i>
<i>photography lesson.</i>


<i> The Vang Trang Khuyet club's members come from Nhan Chinh</i>
<i>school for Deaf Children, Xa Dan secondary School for Deaf</i>
<i>Children and Mute Children, and the Hanoi Literature and Art</i>
<i>Club for Mentally Retarded Children.</i>



<i> "Whenever we hold a camera, wandering around and talking in</i>
<i>our surroundings through a lens, we can forget the sorrow of our</i>
<i>disabilities "?say club member Nguyen Minh Tam.</i>


<i> The six-mouth-old photographic club, which comprises 19 deaf,</i>
<i>mute or mentally retarded children, is now having its first</i>
<i>exhibition in Hanoi.</i>


<i> More than 50 colour photos are on display at the exhibition room</i>
<i>featuring the beauty of daily life seen through the eyes of these</i>
<i>disabled children.</i>


<i> The subjects are simple and peaceful: old men reading books on</i>
<i>the blanks of Hoan Kiem lake, laborers hard at work, or chickens</i>
<i>looking for food.</i>


<i> The children's passion for taking pictures has stimulated them and</i>
<i>helped them escape their sorrow.</i>


7’



after you listen


<b>* Q&A </b>


Tell Ss to work in group : Ask and answer about the Vang


Trang Khuyet Photographic club.



Suggest some questions :




<i>What is the name of the club?</i>


<i>Who are the members of the club? Where do they come </i>
<i>from?</i>


<i> How many are there?</i>


<i>How many photographs are on display?</i>
<i>What are their photographs about ?</i>


<i>What does their passion of taking photographs help them?</i>


<i><b>Note</b></i>

<i> : If time allowed, call on some Ss to retell story about the </i>


Vang Trang Khuyet Photographic Club in front of the class.



Group


work



3’

Wrapping up and homework


Summarise the main points.



Assign homework.

Whole

class



self - evaluation :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b>Date of preparing : 7th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 22</b>




<b>unit 4 - lesson 4 - writing</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :



- read and understand a simple letter of complaint.



- write a letter of complaint about the poor quality of the service at an English Centre.


<b>II. Materials</b>:


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


<b>IV. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


7’



warm - up


<b>Categorizing</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups.



Give ten or more adjectives and ask Ss to put them under two


headings : compliments and complaints.




<i>bad, helpful, expensive, lazy, hard-working, good, careful, poor,</i>
<i>unhappy, beautiful.</i>


Feedback and give correct answers :



<b>Compliments</b> <b>Complaints</b>


helpful bad


hard-working expensive


good lazy


careful poor


beautiful unhappy


... ...


Give definition and format of a letter of complaint:



<i>Complaint is a kind of formal letter used when you are not</i>


<i>happy with a service, a contract, a course, ... A letter of</i>


<i>complaint usually includes three main parts</i>

<i>:</i>


<i><b>1. Opening</b></i>



<i><b>2. Explaining the problem</b></i>


<i><b>3. Suggesting a resolution</b></i>




Group work



10’



presentation


Ask Ss to work in pair and read the advertisement.


Explain some difficult words :



<i>native teacher (n) : giáo viên ngời bản xứ</i>


<i>air-conditioned (a) : đợc trang bị điều hoà</i>


<b>Set the scene.</b>



<i>After studying for two weeks at English for Today Centre,</i>
<i>you notice that everything is worse than what the advertisement</i>
<i>says. A friend of yours wants to know about the centre and you</i>
<i>tell him/her the facts. Now you work in pairs and complete the</i>
<i>dialogue with your own ideas.</i>


<i>Note: The information students use to answer may vary from</i>


one to another. Encourage them to speak naturally.



Go around the class and offer help when necessary.


Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud to class.


Feedback and give correct answers :



<i>A : Are you happy with your study at English for Today Centre?</i>
<i>B : No, (1) <b>I'm definitely not happy with it at all.</b></i>



<i>A : Are teachers native ones only ?</i>


<i>B : No, (2) <b>There are only few native teachers, not all of them are</b></i>
<i><b>native ones.</b></i>


<i>A :The advertisement says there are no more than 20 students in a</i>
<i>class. Is that true ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

<i>B : No, (<b>3) in fact there are more than 30 students in my class.</b></i>


<i>A :Do you get free books and cassette tapes ?</i>
<i>B : No, (4) <b>I have to pay for them.</b></i>


<i>A :What about the classrooms ? Are there air-conditioned?</i>


<i>B : No, (5) <b>the room is not air-conditioned. There is only one ceiling</b></i>
<i><b>fan in my classroom. It is very hot</b>.</i>


<i>A :What don't you like most about the Centre ?</i>


<i>B : It's the time. They say the class time is from 5:30 p.m to 8:30 p.m,</i>


<i><b>but in fact classes often start late and finish early. Sometimes</b></i>
<i><b>it starts 20 minutes late.</b></i>


<i>A :Well. Everything is different from what the advertisement says</i>
<i>What are you going to do ?</i>


<i> B : I am going to write a letter of complaint to the director of the centre.</i>



15’



practice


Have Ss read the letter of complaint in the book and complete


it basing on the dialogue in Task 1.



Ask Ss to use appropriate connectors to make the writing smoother


Tell Ss to exchange their writing with a friend.



Introduce peer correction



Pick up some writings to check the mistakes as the whole class.


Give correct answers :



<i> 53 Ho Xuan Huong Street,</i>
<i> Quang Ninh, Vietnam,</i>


<i> 22 February, 2006</i>
<i> The Director</i>


<i>English for Today Center</i>


<i>731 Van Xuan Street, Hanoi, Vietnam</i>
<i>Dear Sir,</i>


<i> I am writing to complain about the quality of service at your center.</i>
<i>Everything seems to be worse than what you say in the advertisement.</i>


<i> First of all, you say that there are only native teachers, but my class has</i>


<i>one Vietnamese teacher and two native teachers. You also say that each class</i>
<i>has no more than 20 students but there are over 30 students in my class.</i>
<i>Furthermore, in the advertisement, you say we can have books and cassette</i>
<i>tapes free of charge but in fact we has to pay for them. To make the matter</i>
<i>worse, the classroom is not air-conditioned. That is quite different from the</i>
<i>advertisement .Finally, what I do not like most about your center is the time.</i>
<i>The class time is not 5the same as what the advertisement say. Classes not</i>
<i>only start late but also finish early.</i>


<i> To resolve the problem, I require you to give me a refund. Enclosed</i>
<i>is a cop of the receipt.</i>


<i> I look forward to hearing from you and to getting a quick resolution</i>
<i>of this problem. </i>


<i>Please contact me at the above address or by phone at (033) 886215</i>
<i> Your faithfully,</i>


<i> Do An Duc.</i>


Individual


work



10’



further practice


If time allowed, instruct Ss to write a reply to letters of


complaint (dealing with complaints)




Explain the general format of a reply to letter of complaint :


<i><b>Opening</b></i>


<i><b>Explaining the mistakes</b></i>
<i><b>Solving the problem</b></i>


Ask Ss to complete the following sentences to make a reply



to the complaint about the poor quality of the service at the


above English Centre. (Handouts)



<i>Dear Duc</i>


<i>1. Thank / your letter / inform / me / poor / service / centre.</i>
<i>2. We / examine / the situation / and / find / what /say / true.</i>
<i>3. This / due / the / difficulty/ finance and / low / discipline/ teachers.</i>
<i>4. We / send / another / better / class / next week.</i>


<i>5. If you like, we / give / refund but you / get / 80 per cent / </i>
<i>money / back.</i>


<i>6. I / beg / sympathy and / look / forward / support.</i>
<i>Yours truly,</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Call on some Ss to read their completed letter.


Give feedback sentence by sentence.



<i>Dear Duc</i>


<i>1 . Thank you for your letter which informs me the poor service at our centre.</i>


<i>2. We have examined the situation and found that what you say is true.</i>
<i>3. This is due to the difficulty in finance and low discipline of teachers.</i>
<i>4. We will send you to a better class next week.</i>


<i>5. If you like, we will give you a refund but you will only get 80 per</i>
<i>cent of your money back.</i>


<i>6. I beg your sympathy and look forward to your on-going support.</i>
<i>7. Your truly,</i>


3’

Wrapping up and homework


Summarize the main points.



Assign homework.



Whole


class.



self - evaluation :


...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 9th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 23</b>



<b>unit 4 - lesson 5 - language focus</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to



- distinguish and pronounce the sounds /

ɔ

/ and /

ɔ:/ correctly.



- use the + adjective as a noun, combine two sentences with


which and review used to + infinitive.



<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


<b>IV. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


7’



<b>warm - up</b>
<b>Find someone who</b>....


Prepare a two-column table with Yes/No questions and


<b>Name.</b>



Let Ss go around the class and ask other Ss what they used


to do when they were small. If the answer is Yes, write


his/her name in the table.



The winner is the first one who completes the Name



column.



<b>Did you use to</b>... <b>Name</b>


cry at night ?


go to bed late ?


be afraid of ghost ?


eat a lot of ice scream ?



...


Group work



5



<b>Pronunciation</b>
<b>presentation 1</b>


Demonstrate the sounds / ɔ / and / ɔ:/ by pronouncing


them clearly slowly.



Instruct the way to pronounce the two sounds :



/ ɔ / first pronounce the sound / ɔ / then put your tongue


slightly back and bring your lips slightly forward.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

/ ɔ / is a short sound.



/ ɔ:/ first practice the sound then put the back of your


tongue up a little.




/ ɔ:/ is a long sound.



Make sure that Ss are aware of the difference between the


two sounds.



Ask Ss to repeat several times.



5’

Play the tape and ask them to repeat.

<b>practice 1</b>


Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to class.


Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.


Introduce peer correction.



Go around the class and provide help if necessary.



Pair work



5



<b>grammar and vocabulary</b>
<b>presentation 2</b>


<b>The + adjective (plural noun).</b>



explicit the use of

<i><b>The + adjective</b></i>

<b> by analyzing the example:</b>



<i><b>The young</b></i>

have the future in their hands.


The young = young people.




We use

<i><b>The + adjective</b></i>

to describe a group of people as a



whole : e.g. the blind, the rich, the poor. So the rich means a


group of people who are rich.



These adjectives are followed by a plural verb.





Whole class



5’



<b>practice 2</b>


Ask Ss to work individually and complete the sentences using


<i><b>the + one of the adjectives</b></i>

in the book.



Have Ss compare their answers with a friend.


Call on some Ss to read their completed sentences.


Feedback and give correct answers.



2. Ambulances arrived at the scene of the accident and took


<i><b>the injured</b></i>

<i> to hospital.</i>



<i>3. Life is all right if you have a job, but things are not so easy</i>


<i>for </i>

<i><b>the unemployed</b></i>

<i>.</i>



<i>4. Julia has been a nurse all her life. She has spent her life</i>


<i>caring for </i>

<i><b>the sick.</b></i>




<i>5. In England there is an old story about a man called Robin</i>


<i>Hood. It is said that he robbed </i>

<i><b>the rich</b></i>

<i> and gave money to</i>


<i><b>the poor</b></i>

<i>.</i>



Individual


work.



5’



<b>presentation 3</b>

Revision of used to + infinitive



We use used to + infinitive to express a past action and


state. It has no present equivalent.



E.g: When I was a child, we used to go holiday to the


<i>seaside.</i>



Notice the negative and the question :


<i>Where </i>

<i><b>did you use</b></i>

<i> to go ?</i>



<i>We </i>

<i><b>didn't use</b></i>

<i> do anything interesting.</i>



Whole class



3’



<b>practice 3</b>

Ask Ss to do exercise 2:




Complete the sentences with:

<i><b>used to ...+ a suitable verb</b></i>

<b>.</b>



Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend.


Check the answers as the whole class.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Give correct answers :



<i>2. Liz <b>used to have</b> a motorbike, but last year she sold it and</i>
<i>bought a car.</i>


<i>3. We came to live in Manchester a few years ago. We <b>used to live</b></i>


<i>in Nottingham.</i>


<i>4. I rarely eat ice-cream now but I <b>used to eat</b> it when I was w child.</i>


<i>5. Jim <b>used to be</b> my best friend but we aren't friends any longer.</i>


<i>6. It only takes me about 40 minutes to get to work since the new</i>


<i>road was opened. It <b>used to take</b> more than a hour.</i>


<i>7. There <b>used to be</b> a hotel apposite the station but it closed a</i>


<i>long time ago.</i>


<i>8. When you lives in London, <b>did you used to go </b>to the theatre ?</i>


3’




<b>presentation 4</b>


Which can be used in relative clauses to refer to the whole of


the earlier clause.



<b>E.g </b>

:


<i>She arrived on time, which amazed everybody.</i>
<i>Sheila couldn't come to the party, which was a pity.</i>


Whole class



7’

<sub>Ask Ss to work in pairs and do exercise 3 : </sub>

<b>practice 4</b>


Join a sentence from A with one from B to make a new



sentence using

<i><b>Which.</b></i>



<i><b>Note</b></i>

<i>: This exercise can be organized through the game</i>


<i>Finding the ideal partner :</i>



Divide class into two big teams : A and B



Label Ss in A as 1,2,3 to 7 and Ss in B as a, b, c to g partner. It


means that Ss have to find the student who has the most


suitable sentence to make a new one.



When Ss find his or her partner, ask them to join the sentences.


Call on some couples to read their sentences.




Feedback and give correct answers :



2. <i>Jill isn't on the phone, which makes it difficult to contact her.</i>
<i>3. Neil has passed his examinations, which is good news.</i>


<i>4. Our flight was delayed, which meant we had to wait for hours at the airport.</i>
<i>5. Ann offered to let me stay in her house, which was very nice of her.</i>
<i>6. The street I live in is very noisy at night, which makes it difficult to sleep.</i>
<i>7. Our car has broken down, which means we can't go away tomorrow.</i>


Pair work.



<b>self - evaluation</b>


...


...


...



<b>Date of preparing : 11th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 24 </b>



<b>Checking the first test</b>


<b>(45 minutes)</b>



<b>I. Aim of the test checking:</b>


-

Find and Correct Sts’ mistakes




-

Retell them about the uses of the structures that they were not correct.



<b>II. Organization</b>:
<b>III. Procedure:</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


7’



<b>Listening</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

the board if they can.



T comments the sts’ s papers.


<b>Typescript</b>


Alexander Yersin was born in (1)<i><b> 1863 </b></i>in Switzerland. In 1882, he
received a baccalaureate degree in (2) <i><b>literature</b></i>, and in 1888, after
having graduated from a medical (3)<i><b> school </b></i>in Paris, he formally
changed his citizenship to French. He joined Dr. Louis Pasteur’s team at
about the same (4)<i><b> time</b></i> . Thereafter, he became (5)<i><b> famous </b></i>through
much of the pioneering work done by Pasteur’s team. His wanderlust
brought him to (6)<i><b> Vietnam </b></i>. In July 1891, his expedition to the
highlands of Vietnam led to the discovery of Da Lat, and (7) <i><b>many</b></i> later
discoveries of (8)<i><b> water </b></i>sources in this region.


Whole class



7’




<b>Pronunciation</b>


- Call on sts to go to the board to read and write the


pronunciation of the word to find out the word pronounce


different from the others.



- T gives feedback.


<b>KEY:</b>


1. B 2. B


3. B 4. C


Individual


work



10’



<b>Grammar</b>


- T asks sts to revise the uses of gerund, infinitive…


- Questions.



- Adverbs of frequency.


- Prepositions



KEY:



1. c 2. c 3. 4. d



5. b 6. a 7. c 8. d


9. c 10. d 11. a 12. a


-

Retell the forms of the past tenses, present tenses.



-

Gerund



-

T. comments.



Whole class



10’



<b>Reading</b>


- T. asks sts to read the passage once more time to choose T/ F


and answer the questions



- T. checks in front of the class.



1. b 2. c 3. d 4. d 5. b


- Sts translate the passage into Vietnamese to understand the


content of the passage.



A. news B. letter C. moon D. people E. weekend
F. birthday G. picnic H. wood I. able J. noise


Thank you very much for your (1)<i><b> letter</b></i>, which arrived this


morning. It was really my turn to write, as you say, but I seem to have so
little (2)<i><b> news </b></i>these days. I mean, life goes on as always, and nothing
special seems to happen. Last (3)<i><b> weekend </b></i>was fun, though. As you may
remember, it’s Daisy’s (4)<i><b> birthday </b></i>last Saturday, and she wanted to do
something different. Instead of the usual party at home, she decided to
have a midnight(5)<i><b> picnic </b></i>in Glover Wood. We all met at a cafeteria, had
a few drinks and then went on down to the (6)<i><b> wood</b></i> . Fortunately, there
was a bright (7)<i><b> moon</b></i>, so we were (8)<i><b> able </b></i> to make way there without
much trouble.


Whole class



9’



<b>Writing</b>


There are some things Ps have to have in the passage:


<i><b>Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning</b></i>
1. Are you interested in studying mathematics?


 Do you <i>enjoy studying mathematics?</i>


2. The last time I met Johnson was 3 years ago.


 I haven’t <i>met Johnson for 3 years.</i>


3. I ride bicycle to school in twenty minutes.


 It takes <i>me twenty minutes to ride bicycle to school.</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

4. James can swim farther than Daisy.


 Daisy can’t <i>swim as (so) far as James</i>


- T reads some good papers in front of the class.


- T corrects the Ps' mistakes carefully.



Self- evaluation:


...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 12th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 25</b>



<b>unit 5: technology and you </b>


<b>lesson 1 - reading</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :



- use a number of works about computers suck as CPU , VDU, CD ROMS,


<i>floppy disks... and talk about their benefits in our modern life.</i>



- improve read skill through Matching and Answering questions exercises.


<b>II. Materials</b>:


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....



Pictures about computers or a computer available in class


<b>III. Organization:</b>


<b> IV. Procedure:</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


7’



<b>warm - up</b>
<b>Matching</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs : Look at the illustration of different


parts a computer system and match each number with one of


the words or phrases in the box.



Note : Ss may know the parts of a computer but they don't


know English words them so just go around the class and


provide help when necessary.



Call on some Ss to read their answers in front of the class.


Feedback and give further explanations.



Give correct answers :




1. D 2. E 3. G 4. C
5.A 6.F 7.B 8. H


10’



<b>before you read</b>
<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>miraculous(a) : tut vêi</i>


<i>calculating machine(n) : m¸y tÝnh</i>
<i>calculations : phÐp tÝnh </i>


<i>lightning speed (n) : tốc độ ánh sáng</i>
<i>storage device (n) : thiết bị lu giữ thông tin</i>


<i>memos = memorandums (n) : sỉ ghi nhí, tin nh¾n</i>


<i>request for leave (n) : xin phép nghỉ học hoặc làm nghỉ học</i>


<b>Brainstorming</b>


Ask ss to work in groups and make a list of the benefits of


computers in modern life / the roles of computers in modern


life / thing that computers can do.



Gather the ideas and introduce the reading :



<i>Computers play a very important role in our modern life. They </i>
<i>bring so many benefits to make our life easier. The following </i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<i>passage will help you know more about them.</i>


7’



5’



6’



<b>while you read</b>
<b>Task 1 - </b><i><b>Matching</b></i>


Ask Ss to read the passage and match the words in A (which


appear in the reading passage ) with the definition in B.



Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of the words in the context


in which they appear.



Call on some students to read and explain their answers in


front of the class.



Feedback and give correct answers :



<i>1. a (magical - in a strange or mysterious way)</i>


<i>2. e (places of scenic beauty - places where the scenes are</i>
<i>interesting and beautiful)</i>


<i>3. a ( interact - link or act on3each other )</i>



<i>4. software (programs performed by the computer )</i>
<i>5. hardware ( the physical part of the computer system )</i>


<b>Task 2 - </b><i><b>Passage Headings</b></i>


Tell Ss to read the pass the passage more carefully and choose


the best title for it.



Let Ss discuss their answer with friend. Encourage them to


explain their choice.



Further explain and give correct answer:



<i>C . What can the computer do ?</i>


<b>Task 3 - </b><i><b>Answering questions</b></i>


Have Ss work in pairs and answer the questions using the given cues.


Go around the class and provide help when necessary.



Call on some pair to act out the activity in front of the class.


Comment and give suggested answers :



<i><b>1. What can the computer do to help us in our daily life ?</b></i>


<i> - It help us visit shops, offices and places of interests, pay</i>
<i>bills, read newspapers, receive letter.</i>


<i><b>2. Why is computer a miraculous device ?</b></i>



<i> - Because it is capable of doing anything you ask; it can speed</i>
<i>up the calculations , allow you to type and print any kind of</i>
<i>document...</i>


Individual


work



Individual


work



Pair work



7’



<b>after you read</b>


Ask Ss to work in pair or groups and discuss other uses of


computer in daily life.



Suggest questions for discussion :



<i>Do you usually use computers ?</i>


<i>What do you do when you use computers?</i>
<i>What do you like most about computers ?</i>


<i>What uses of computer may bring bad effect to its uses ?</i>


<i>...</i>



Group work



3’



<b>Wrapping up and homework</b>

Summarize the main points.



Assign homework.

whole class



<b>self - evaluation</b>


...


...


...



<b>Date of preparing : 15th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 26</b>



<b>unit 5 - lesson 2 - speaking</b>
<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the uses of modern


inventions in daily life such as radio, TV, fax machine, air conditioner...



<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


Real objects of modern inventions




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>III. Organization:</b>
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


10’

warm - up


<b>What is it ?</b>


Divide class into two big teams : A and B.



Give team A a list of 10 words about modern inventions :



<i>1. TV 2. fax machine</i>
<i>3. air conditioner 4. radio</i>


<i>5. electric cooker 6. fridge</i>


<i>7. cell phone 8. washing machine</i>
<i>9. car 10. microware oven</i>


Team A has to explain the words and team B has to guess


what the word is.



Team work


Individual



work




7’



presentation


<b>Task 1 - </b><i><b>asking and answering</b></i>


Have Ss to work in pairs : Ask and answer questions about the


uses of modern inventions following the example.



Note that five inventions are in the above game.



Call on some pair to ask and answer in front of the class.



Comment and give suggested answers

:


<i>Can / Could you tell me what the radio is used for ?</i>


<i>Well, it's used to listen to the news and learn foreign languages.</i>
<i>Can / Could you tell me what the TV is used for ?</i>


<i>Well, it's used to watch football matches, and TV game shows.</i>
<i>Can / Could you tell me what the fax machine is used for ?</i>
<i>Well, it's used to sent and receive letters quickly.</i>


<i>Can / Could you tell me what the electric cooker is used for ?</i>
<i>Well, it's used to cook rice and keep rice warm..</i>


<i>Can / Could you tell me what the air conditioner is used for ?</i>
<i>Well, it's used to keep the air cool when it's hot and vice versa.</i>



Pair work



7’



practice


<b>Task 2 - </b><i><b>Sentence Completion</b></i>


Keep Ss in pairs and ask them to complete the sentences by


using the words in the box.



Ask ss to study the sentences carefully before deciding which


word to be used.



Call on some pair to read the sentences aloud in front of the class.


Give correct answers :



<i>Information technology is very useful to our lives. It allows us to :</i>
<i>1. <b>Store </b>very large amounts of information,</i>


<i>2<b>. transmit</b> information quickly</i>


<i>3. <b>process</b> information as soon as we receive it.</i>


<i>With the development of information technology we can now :</i>
<i>4.<b> send</b> messages from one computer to another,</i>


<i>5.<b> hold</b> long distance meetings in which the participants can</i>
<i>see each other on a screen,</i>



<i>6. <b>make</b> use of central stores of information,</i>


<i>7.<b> sent</b> TV programmes to other countries,</i>
<i>8. <b>receiv</b>e TV programmes from other countries</i>
<i>9<b>. design</b> houses, bridges, gardens and buildings.</i>


<b>Task 3 - Ordering</b>


Have Ss work in pair groups by joining two pairs. Ask them to


look at the ideas in Task 2 and then rank them in order of


importance.



Encourage Ss to actively discuss in groups to give the reasons


to support their ideas and persuade the others that your order



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

is the right one.



Suggest some structures in discussion :



<i>I thing / believe that the most important use of information</i>
<i>technology is ...because...</i>


8’

further practice


Have Ss work in groups and talk about their most favourite


invention of our daily life.



Call on some Ss to give a short talk about their favourite


invention in front of the class.




Comment on Ss' performance and make necessary


corrections.



Group work



3’

Wrapping up and homework


Summarize the main points.



Assign homework.

Whole class



self - evaluation :


...
...


<b>Date of preparing: 16th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 27</b>



<b>unit 5 - lesson 3 - listening</b>


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how a person learns to use a


computer and improve listening skill through True or False and Gap-filling exercises.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


IV. procedure :



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>

5’



warm - up


<b>Ask and answers</b>


Ask Ss to work independently and answer the question by


checking the right column :



How often do you use each of the items below ?



very often sometime never


<i>radio</i>
<i>cell phone</i>
<i>camcorder</i>
<i>computer</i>
<i>TV</i>


<i>fax machine</i>


Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend and further


discuss the uses of these items.




Individual


work



and


Pair work



7’

<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>before you listen


<i>worried - lo lắng</i>


<i>shy - ngợng ngùng , xấu hổ</i>
<i>memory - bộ ngớ</i>


<i>refuse - từ chối</i>


<i>make an excuse - xin lỗi</i>
<i>headache - ®au ®Çu</i>


Ask Ss to repeat the words several times to make sure they



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

pronounce them correctly


<b>Checking technique :</b>
<i><b>Rub out and remember</b></i>


- Write all the words and their meanings on the board into two


column.



- Rub out all the words in English column and keep the


Vietnamese one.




When all the words in English column are rubbed, ask Ss to


look at the Vietnamese one and recall all the English words.


10’



while you listen


<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You hear an old company director talking about his experience of</i>
<i>learning how to use a computer from his son. You listen to the tape</i>


<i>and do Task 1 : Decide whether the statements are true or false.</i>


<b>Task 1 - </b><i><b>True or False</b></i>


Ask Ss to read the statements carefully before listening to the tape.


Play the tape more than once if necessary.



Ask Ss to compare their answers with a friend.



Call on some Ss to read and explain their answers in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers :



<i> 1 - F 2 - T 3 - T </i>
<i> 4 - F 5 - F 6 - F</i>


<b>Task 2 </b><i><b>- Gap-filling</b></i>


Play the tape again and ask Ss to do Task 2 : Write the missing words


Tell Ss to write the exact word for the blanks.




Let Ss to discuss the answers with a friend.


Give correct answers :



<i>1. invited</i>
<i>2. still</i>
<i>3. refused</i>
<i>4. excuse</i>
<i>5. anything</i>


<b>Tape script</b>


<i>Well, I wasn't worried when my son bought a computer. After all lots of</i>
<i>children have parents who don't understand computers. But when my</i>
<i>secretary asked me for a computer in office, I really became worried. So I</i>
<i>decide to take some lesson in computing and my son became my teacher.</i>
<i>He's very helpful. He invited me o sit down in front of the computer</i>
<i>screen which I did not know what to call it.</i>


<i>When I ask him what it was, he said that it was a VDU. I still didn't know</i>
<i>what VDU was, but I was too shy to ask him any more. From that moment</i>
<i>my memory refused to learn because he told me a lot of things that I</i>
<i>really didn't understand at all. After a few lessons I began to feel tired. I</i>
<i>made an excuse, saying that I was having a headache. I suggested we</i>
<i>should leave the lesson until another day. Since then I haven't said</i>
<i>anything about the computer to my son and my secretary.</i>


Individual


work




10’



after you read


Ask Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer about the man's story.


<i>What did the man's son buy ?</i>



<i>What did the man become worried ?</i>


<i>What didn't the man know ?</i>



<i>What happened to the man's memory ?</i>


<i>What did the man suggest ?</i>



<i>... </i>



Pair work



3’



Wrapping up and homework.


Summarize the main points.



Assign homework

.


whole class



self - evaluation :


...


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>unit 5 - lesson 4 - writing</b>



<b>I. Objectives.</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write simple instructions on how to use


some household appliances.



<b>II. Materials.</b>


Textbook, samples of some instructions


<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


5’



<b>warm - up</b>
<b>Matching</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups and match the words in A with the


words in B.



- Note : All the verbs are commonly used in the language of


instruction.



<b>A</b>

<b>B</b>



<i>1. insert</i> <i>a. long bip</i>



<i>2. make</i> <i>b. button</i>


<i>3.press</i> <i>c. card</i>


<i>4. hear</i> <i>d. a call</i>


<b>Answers:</b>


1 . C 2 . D 3 . B 4 . A



group work



10’

<b>presentation</b>


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>lift - nhấc lên</i>
<i>receiver- ống nghe</i>
<i>insert- đa vào</i>
<i>slot- khe</i>
<i>press- ấn nút</i>


<i>emergency- cấp cứu</i>
<i>ambulance-xe cấp cứu</i>


<i>remote control- điều khiển từ xa</i>
<i>cord- dây dÉn</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>


<i><b>Rub out and remember</b></i>


Write all the new words and their meaning on the board.



Rub out all the words in English and keep their Vietnamese


meanings.



When all the words are rubbed, ask Ss to look at the Vietnamese


meanings and recall all the English words.



<b>Task 2 - </b><i><b>Finding Connectors and Imperatives</b></i>


- Ask Ss to read the set of instructions on how to use a public


telephone.



- Go around the class and provide help if necessary.



- Make sure Ss get general understanding of the instruction.


- Tell Ss to work in pairs to find out the connectors and the


imperative forms of the verbs from the instructions.



- Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.


- Feedback and give correct answers :



<b>* Connectors : first, next, then, until</b>
<b>* Imperatives :</b>

<i>lift, insert, press, wait</i>



Notice Ss that connectors and imperatives are used in instruction.



Group work



&



whole class



whole class



Individual


work



7’

<b>practice</b>


<b>Task 3 - </b><i><b>Answering question</b></i>


- Ask Ss to work in groups : Look at the TV and the remote


control and answer the questions on how to operate the TV.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

- Tell Ss to look at the remote control carefully when doing the task.


- Call on some Ss from the groups to answer the questions in


front of the class.



<b>Task 4 - </b><i><b>Writing Instructions</b></i>


Ask Ss to write a set of instructions on how to operate a TV with


a remote control. Use the picture in the book and answers above


as suggestions.



Tell Ss to compare their writing and correct in front of class as a whole.



Group work




Individual


work



10’

<b>further practice</b>


- Call on some Ss to read the writing aloud in front of the class.


- Ask some Ss to comment on presenters' performance.



- Make necessary corrections.



Whole


class



3’

<b>Wrapping up and homework.</b>


Summarize the main points.


Assign homework.



whole class



<b>self - evaluation</b>


...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 20th<sub> October, 2008 </sub></b>

Period 29



<b>unit 5- lesson 5 - language focus</b>



<b>I. Objectives</b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :



- pronounce the sounds /

u

/ and /

u: / clearly and correctly



- use the present perfect and present perfect passive appropriately.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


5’

<b>Categorizing</b> <b>warm - up</b>


- Give out 10 to 15 words.



- Ask Ss to put the words under the appropriate heading :



<b>Who</b> <b>Which</b> <b>Where</b>


Example of the words :



<i>nurse, teacher, book, park, museum, ...</i>



group work



4’

<b>presentation 1pronunciation</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

them clearly and slowly.



- Help Ss to distinguish these two sounds by instructing the


way to pronounce :



/ u / first pronounce the sound / a / then put the back of your


tongue forward and up a little



/ u / is a short sound



/ u: / first pronounce the sound / u / then put your tongue


up and back.



/ u: / is a long sound.



- Make sure that Ss are aware of the difference between the sounds.


- Ask Ss to repeat several times.



whole class



Individual


work



3’

- Play the tape and ask Ss to repeat.

<b>practice 1</b>


- Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly in front of the class.


- Ask Ss to work in pair and practice the sentences.



- Introduce peer correction.




- Go around the class and provide help if necessary.



whole class


Individual


work



8’



<b>grammar and vocabulary</b>
<b>presentation 2</b>


<i><b>The present perfect</b></i>


Review the form and use of the present perfect.


<b>Form</b>


(+) S + have / has + P

II

+ O



(- ) S + haven't / hasn't + P

II

+ O



(?) Have / has + S +P

II

+ O



Yes, S + have / has


No, S + haven't / hasn't


<b>Use</b>


The present perfect expresses an action which began in the


past and still continues :



<i>I have worked as a teacher for five years.</i>




Notice the time expressions that are common with this use.



We use for with a period of time, and

<i><b>Since </b></i>

with a point in



time.


E.g :



<i> two years</i>
<i> a month</i>
<i>For a few minutes</i>
<i> half an hour</i>
<i> ages</i>


<i> 1970</i>


<i>Since the end of the lesson</i>
<i> August</i>


<i> Christmas</i>


whole class


Individual



work



5’

Ask Ss to do exercise1: Study the situation and put the verbs

<b>practice 2</b>


in the present perfect tense .




Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers ;



<i>Tan has invited Quang to his house. When Quang comes, he sees that :</i>


<i>tan has opened the door.</i>



<i>He has turned / switched on the TV</i>


<i>He has tidied the house.</i>



<i>He has cleaned the floor.</i>



<i>He has turned / switched on the lights.</i>


<i>He has laid two bottle of water on the table.</i>



whole class


Individual



work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

5’

Review the rules of changing active into passive voice.


Explain the form the present perfect passive :



<i>S + have / has +been + PII + O</i>


E.g :


<i> A new bridge has been built across the river.</i>


Individual



work



5’

- Ask Ss to work in pairs and do Exercise 2 : Build the

<b>practice 3</b>

sentences after the model. Use the present perfect passive.


- Tell them to exchange the exercises and cross check.


- Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board.


- Check and give feedback to class as a whole.



5’



<b>presentation 4</b>


Overview of

<i><b>Who, which </b></i>

and

<i><b> that ;</b></i>



<i><b>Who</b></i>

and

<i><b>which ( that )</b></i>

can be uses in place of noun subject



and noun objects.



When they refer to the subject, they can not normally be


omitted . E.g :



<i>This is the man who lives next door.</i>



When they refer to the object, they can not normally be


omitted . E.g. :



<i>This is the man who I ( m ) like</i>


<i><b>Who</b></i>

<b> refers to people</b>



<i><b>Which</b></i>

refers to things




Further explain when necessary.



whole class


Pair work



5’

Ask Ss to do exercise 3 .Fill in the blanks with

<b>practice 4</b>

<i><b>who, which </b></i>

or



<i><b>that.</b></i>



Call on some Ss to read their sentence aloud in front of the class.


Give correct answers :



<i>1. which </i>
<i>2. which </i>
<i>3. which</i>
<i>4. who</i>
<i>5. who</i>
<i>6. who</i>
<i>7. who(m)</i>
<i>8. which</i>
<i>9. which</i>
<i>10 who</i>


Individual


work



<b>self - evaluation :</b>


...


...
...
...
...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 25th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 30 </b>



<b>unit 6: an excursion</b>


<b>lesson 1 - reading</b>


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

- improve reading comprehension skill by doing Multiple choice and


Answering question exercises.



<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....



- Large pictures about Thien Mu pagoda, Ha Long Bay, The One- Pillar Pagoda, and Da Lat.


<b>IV. Procedure :</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


10’




warm - up


<b>Networks</b>


- Ask Ss to work in groups in tree to four and make a list of


famous place in Vietnam.



The group with the longest will be the winner.



- Gather ideas and ask Ss to work in pairs : Match the photos


with the information in the book, then tell each other which


of the places you would like to visit and give reasons.



<b>Note : T may be hang large pictures on the board so that T</b>


can help Ss follow easily and keep them interested.



- Call on some Ss to tell their answers in front of the class.


- Ask Ss to share their background information about these places.


- Feedback and give correct answers ;



<i>Number 1 is Thien Mu Pagoda. It's on the left bank of the Huong</i>
<i>River, 6 kilometers from Hue city.</i>


<i>Number 2 is Ha Long Bay. It's a picturesque site, a wonder of the</i>
<i>would, 165 kilometers from Hanoi.</i>


<i>Number3 is One-Pillar Pagoda. It's was built in 1049. in shape of a lotus.</i>
<i>Number 4 is Da Lat City. It's a mountain resort ( altitude :</i>
<i>1,500m ) with various ideal excursion places : Xuan Huong Lake,</i>


<i>pine forests, waterfalls...</i>


- Ts. are advised to give further information regarding


these 4 places.



Group work



5’



before you read


Have Ss work in pairs : Ask and answer the following question.



<i>Do you usually have an excursion ?</i>
<i>When did you last have it ? Where to ?</i>
<i>What impressed you most ?</i>


<i>What was the most interesting thing that you did on the excursion ?</i>
<i>...</i>


<b>Set the scene :</b>


<i>You are going to read a letter from Lan to her friend, Minh about</i>
<i>his recent fantastic excursion to a cave near Hanoi. You read the</i>
<i>letter and do the tasks followed.</i>


Whole class


Individual


work




10’



10’



while you read


<b>Task 1 - </b><i><b>Multiple Choice</b></i>


- Ask Ss to read the letter individually and choose the best


answer A, B, C or D to complete each of the sentences.



- Ask Ss to compare their answers with a friend.



- Call on Ss to read and explain their answers in front of the class.


- Feedback and give correct answers ;



1. C 2. D 3. A
<b>Task 2 - </b><i><b>Answering Questions.</b></i>


Ask Ss to work in pair and answers the questions.



Call on some pair to act out the activity in front of the class.


Check the answers in front of the class as a whole.



Give correct answers ;



<i>1. They are going on a trip when they have some days-off after the 1st term.</i>
<i>2. They are visiting some caves because they want to understand their </i>
<i>geography lesson better and many of them have never been inside a cave.</i>
<i>3. It s only over 20 km.</i>’



<i>4. They are going to make a two- day trip and have a night campfire. </i>
<i>They are bringing their own food and sharing buses with some other </i>
<i>classes to make the trip cheap.</i>


<i>5. Lan is anxious about her parents' permission. They may not want to </i>
<i>let her stay the night away from home.</i>


Whole class



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- Call on some Ss to read the letter aloud in front of the class.


- Make necessary corrections regarding Ss' pronunciation.


7’



after you read


<i><b>Summary completion</b></i>


- Have Ss work independently and fill in each blank with a


suitable group of words from the text.



- Ask Ss to read the summary carefully before doing the task.


- Have them compare the answers with a friend.



- Call on some Ss to read the completed summary.


- Feedback and give correct answers ;



<i>1. going to make</i>
<i>2. some caves</i>
<i>3. want to see</i>


<i>4. have learnt</i>
<i>5. their trip</i>
<i>6. only problem</i>
<i>7. to persuade them</i>
<i>8. her classmates.</i>


Whole class



3’



Wrapping up and homework.


Summarize the main points.



Assign homework.

whole class



self - evaluation :


...
...


<b>Date of preparing : 26th<sub> October, 2008</sub></b>


<b>Period 31</b>



<b>unit 6 - lesson 2 - speaking</b>



<b>I. Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on



Lake Michigan in Chicago.



<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


Class

Date of teaching

Absent pupils



10 A1


10 A7


<b>IV. Procedure :</b>


<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b><sub>arrangement</sub></b><b>Work</b></i>


7’

<b>warm - up</b>


<b>* Crossword</b>



- Give out a crossword which has 7 horizontal lines and one


vertical line. The word in the vertical line is made up of 7


letters from the 7 horizontal lines.



- Give information / definition of the words in the horizontal line.


- Ask Ss to work in groups and find the words.



- Each correct word in the horizontal line gets 10 points and


the one in the vertical line gets 40 points.



<b>1</b> <b>c</b> a v e



<b>2</b> s u n s <b>h</b> I n e


<b>3</b> r <b>I</b> v e r


<b>4</b> e x <b>c</b> u r s I o n


p a g o d <b>a</b>


<b>6</b> <b>g</b> e o g r a p h


<b>7</b> m <b>o</b> u t a I n


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<i>1. A natural cavity below the earth surface or in the mountain.</i>
<i>2. Light of the sun.</i>


<i>3. A large natural stream of water.</i>
<i>4. A short journey usually for pleasure.</i>


<i>5. A temple or sacred tower in Asian countries.</i>


<i>6. The science that studies the surface of the earth and its</i>
<i>associated physical, biological, economic, political features.</i>


<i>7. A hill of impressive height.</i>


Vertical line : Chicago



Note : Ss are suggested to use simpler words when explaining


the words so that it will be easier for Ss to find the word.



10’

<b><sub>Vocabulary pre-teach</sub></b>

<b>presentation</b>


<i>sundeck - boong tÇu</i>



<i>get sunburnt - rám, cháy nắng</i>


<i>travel sickness - say tầu, xe</i>



<i>air-conditioned >< non air-conditioned - đợc trang bị điều </i>


<i>hoà >< khụng c trang b iu ho</i>



<i>refreshments - phòng ăn uống, giải khát trên tầu</i>


<i>occupied - đang có ngời sử dụng</i>



<b>Checking technique</b>


<i><b>Sentence modeling</b></i>



Ask Ss to make sentences with the new words they have learnt.


Make certain that Ss understand the meaning of the words and


pronounce them correctly.



Set the scene :



<i>Tim's class is going on a boat trip on lake Michigan in</i>


<i>Chicago. Read the information about some of the participants</i>


<i>to know their problems an their wises.</i>



Whole class



15’

<b><sub>* Task 1 & 2 </sub></b>

<i><b><sub>- Conversation Conduct</sub></b></i>

<b>practice</b>



- Ask Ss to work in group : Read the seat plan carefully and decide


the best seat for each person, using the information in Task 1.



- Further explain the seat plan if necessary.


- Suggest some useful structures :



<i>I don't thing so</i>


<i>To be suitable for..</i>


<i>Why ? Why not ?</i>


<i>What do you think ?</i>


<i>What's your idea ?</i>


<i>Had better.</i>



- Tell Ss to conduct the conversation like the example in the book.


- Go around the class and provide help when necessary.


- Call on some groups to conduct the conversation in front of the class.


- Comment and give suggested answers :



<i>A. I thing seat 1 is most suitable for Mary.</i>


<i>B. Why ?</i>



<i>C. Because she suffers from travel sickness so she can get</i>


<i>lots of fresh air from that seat</i>



<i>D. Yes, put her in seat 1 . What about John?</i>


<i>B. Put him seat at 45.</i>



Group work



Whole class




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<i>A. I don't thing so. John doesn't like air-conditioning so put him in</i>


<i>seat 37. He can take as many photographs as he likes.</i>



<i>C. OK. I thing Susan had better take the seat 10. What do you</i>


<i>think ?</i>



<i>B . I thing it's a good idea because she wants to be near Mary.</i>


<i>...</i>



10’

<b><sub>* Task 3 - </sub></b>

<b>further practice</b>


<i><b>Giving Reasons</b></i>



- Tell Ss to work in pairs and discuss :



<i>Which seat do you think the most suitable for you ?</i>


<i>Why? Use information in Task 1 as suggestions.</i>



- Call on some Ss to talk about their seat preference in front of


the class.



- Comment and make necessary corrections.



Pair work



3’

<sub>- Summarize the main points.</sub>

<b>Wrapping up and homework</b>


- Assign homework.

Whole class




self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to improve their listening skill through Ordering,
Gap-filling and answering questions exercises.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, cassette...


<b>III. Organization:</b>


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


November 2007


IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7


minutes


warm - up


<b>Find someone who</b>


Prepare a two-column table with Yes / No questions and Name.


Let Ss go around the class and ask other Ss what they used to do when they were small.
If the answer is Yes, write his/her name in the table.


The winner

is the first one who completes the Name column.



<b>Do you...</b> <b>Name</b>


<i>like to go for a picnic ?</i>
<i>go with your friends / family ?</i>
<i>always go to the beach for a picnic ?</i>
<i>always go to the mountain for a picnic ?</i>
<i>bring food with you when you go for a picnic ?</i>
...


Whole class


7


minutes <b>Q & A</b> before you listen



Ask Ss to work in pairs and discuss the following questions :
<i>Do you often go for a picnic ?</i>


<i>When is the most important time for a picnic?</i>
<i>Why do people go for picnics ?</i>


Gather ideas from some pairs and introduce some important vocabulary in the
listening.


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


<i>glorious - đẹp trời</i>
<i>assemble - tập hợp</i>


<i>destination - điểm , đích đến</i>
<i>left-overs- thức ăn cịn thừa</i>
<i>delicious - ngon ming</i>


<i>botanic garden - vờn bách thảo</i>
<i>spacious - rộng nhiều kh«ng gian</i>
<i>sleep soundly - ngđ say</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Ordering vocabulary</b></i>


Write all the new words on the board.


Make sentences which contain the new words randomly.
Read the sentences aloud.



Ask Ss to write down the words they hear in order 1, 2, 3, ....


7


minutes Set the scene : while you listen


<i>You are going to listening to a short talk by a student about his picnic with classmates. </i>
<i>You listen to the tape and do the tasks followed.</i>


<b>Task 1 - Pictures Ordering</b>


Ask Ss to work in pair and study the pictures carefully.


Make sure Ss have ideas about the pictures and they can tell the differences among
them


Have Ss listen to the tape and number the pictures in the order they hear. Let Ss do the
task in pairs.


Play the tape more than once if necessary.


Call on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class
Feedback and give correct answers :


1. a 2. e 3.b
4. c 5.f 6.d


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>Task 2 - Gap- filling</b>


Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and fill in the blanks with exact words they hear


Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and have a guess of the missing words first.
Play the tape several times if necessary.


Ask Ss to compare their answers with a friend.


Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers in front of the class.
Check the exercise in front of the class as a whole.


Give correct answers :


<i>1. The weekend picnic 1 enjoyed <b>most was just a few</b> weeks ago</i>
<i>2. My class decide <b>to pay a visit</b> to the Botanic Garden.</i>


<i>3. We assembled <b>at the school gate</b> on time.</i>
<i>4. We made <b>a short tour</b> round the garden.</i>


<i>5. In the afternoon we went on <b>playing some more</b> games.</i>


<b>Task 3 - Answering Questions</b>


Play the tape again and ask Ss to answer the questions independently.
Have Ss compare their answers with a friend.


Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers in front of the class.
Feedback and give correct answers :


<i>1. The weather was very nice.</i>
<i>2. Yes, it was.</i>


<i>3.The garden was beautiful.</i>



<i>4. They could sleep soundly because it was so peaceful and quiet in the garden.</i>
<i>5. They took pictures, played games, talked, sang and danced.</i>


<b>Typescript</b>


<i>The weekend picnic I enjoyed most was just a few weeks ago. My class decided to pay </i>
<i>a visit to the Botanic Garden.</i>


<i> It was a glorious Sunday. We assembled at the school gate on the time and traveled to</i>
<i>the Botanic Garden by bus. It was a long way to our destination and we sang merrily </i>
<i>all the way.</i>


<i>The Botanic Garden was a very beautiful place. We made a short tour round the </i>
<i>garden and took some pictures of the whole class. Then we played a lot of game on a </i>
<i>spacious piece of grassland. One of the boys brought along his guitar and we sang our </i>
<i>favourite songs. We laughed, talked and danced, too. After a delicious meal with </i>
<i>various kinds of food that we brought, we all took a rest. Some of us slept very soundly </i>
<i>because it was so peaceful and quiet there. In the afternoon. we went on playing some </i>
<i>more games. Then we packed up the left-over and started home. We all felt happy.</i>


8


minutes <b>Group work project</b> after you listen


Ask Ss to work in groups of three to four and map out the plan for the picnic this
weekend.


The plan include :
<i>Destination :</i>



<i>Means of transport :</i>
<i>How many :</i>


<i>How long :</i>
<i>Who with ;</i>
<i>What activities :</i>
<i>Bring any food ?</i>
<i>...</i>


Go around the class and provide help if necessary.


If time allowed, call on some groups to talk about their plan in front of the class.
Comment and make necessary corrections.


3


minutes Summarise the main points.Wrapping up and homework.


Assign homework. whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

...
...


Date of preparing : November 8th 2007 period 33

unit 6 - lesson 4 - writing


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a confirmation letter responding to a request and
an invitation.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1


10 A 5 November 2007


IV. procedure :



Time Steps work


arrangement
5



minutes


warm - up


<b>Jumbled words</b>


Divide the class into small groups.


Give each group one card containing 10 words whole letter are jumbled.
Ask Ss to rearrange the letters to make good words.


The group which finishes the task first with the most correct words will be the winner.
E.g.


1. <i>usutnrn => sunburn</i>
<i>2. cpinic => picnic</i>
<i>3. snisksecs => sickness</i>
<i>4. pdccouie => occupied</i>
<i>5. ...</i>


Group work


7


minutes Explain the definition of request and confirmation letters.presentation


<i><b>Request </b>is the letter that responds to the request. It confirms the help is provided or </i>
<i>the information is available or not.</i>



<b>Task1 -Finding Request and confirmation</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs : Read the two letters below and find the request in Nga's letter
and confirmation in Hoa's.


Tell Ss to underline the structure showing requests and confirmation.
Call on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class.


Feedback and give suggested answers ;


<b>Request: </b><i>Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we need for the trip?.</i>


<b>Confirmation : </b><i>Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you need for the trip.</i>
Call on two Ss to read the letters aloud in front of the class.


Further explain the format and structures used in the letters.


Whole class


15


minutes <b>Task 2 - Writing confirmation</b> practice


Ask Ss to read the situations carefully and find the requests in both of them.
Make sure Ss get the requests clearly :


<i>Lan asks you to buy some fruits and bring them to her house.</i>
<i>Minh wants to borrow you a book about wildlife.</i>


Tell Ss to choose one of these situations to write a confirmation letter responding to


each of them


Ask Ss to exchange their writing with a friend.
Introduce peer correction.


Pick up some writings to check in front of the class as a whole.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Give suggested answers:


<b>1</b>


<i>Dear Lan,</i>


<i>Firstly, let me congratulate you on your 15th birthday. Certainly, I will help you to </i>
<i>prepare everything you need for the party. I will go to the nearby market and get them </i>
<i>on Saturday morning. Luckily, Saturday is weekend so I have the whole day free.</i>
<i>I will be at your house at 6.30 p.m on Saturday.</i>


<i>Love,</i>


<b>2</b>


<i>Dear Minh,</i>


<i>I'm happy to tell you that the book you want to borrow is available,. You can use this </i>
<i>for the next two weeks. However, I will not be at home this Saturday. Can you come on</i>
<i>Sunday? I will be waiting for you all day.</i>


<i>See you then, </i>
<i>Yours,</i>



15


minutes <b>Mistakes correction</b> further practice


Ask Ss to work in pairs.


Give out a confirmation letter which contains 10 mistakes. Ss have to find out the
mistakes and correct them.


<i>Dear Hao,</i>


<i>I receives your letter requests the details of the apply form for the video library. I </i>
<i>enclose here the full form and you ask to fill out before sent back to us. You can send </i>
<i>we via e-mail. The deadline is 25th July. You should remember attaching a photo on </i>
<i>the first page of the form. The membership fee are $ 25 per year and it is not refund if</i>
<i>you leave the library for any reasons.</i>


<i>I am looking forward to hear fro you soon.</i>
<i>Your truly,</i>


Director


<b>Answers:</b>


<i>Dear Hao,</i>


<i>I <b>receives</b> your letter<b> requests</b> the details of the <b>apply</b> form for the video library. I </i>
<i>enclose here the full form and you<b> ask</b> to fill out before <b>send</b> back to us. You can send </i>



<i><b>we</b> via e-mail or by air-mail. The deadline is 25th July. You should remember </i>


<i><b>attaching</b> a photo on the first page of the form. The membership fee<b> are</b> $ 25 per year </i>
<i>and it is not <b>refund</b> if you leave the library for any reasons.</i>


<i>I am looking forward to <b>hear</b> from you soon.</i>
<i> Your truly,</i>


Director


<b>Mistake correction</b>


<i>1. receives -> have received</i>
<i>2. requests -> requesting</i>
<i>3. apply -> application</i>
<i>4. ask -> are asked</i>
<i>5. send -> sending </i>
<i>6. we -> us</i>
<i>7. attaching -> to attach</i>
<i>8. are -> is</i>


<i>9. refund -> refundable </i>
<i>10 . hear -> hearing</i>


Pair work


3


minutes Summarise the main points.Wrapping up and homework.



Assign homework. whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

Date of preparing : November 10th 2007 period 34

unit 6 - lesson 5 - language focus


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


class Date of teaching Absent pupils



10 A1


10 A 5 November 2007


IV. procedure :



Time Steps work


arrangement
10


minutes warm - up


<b>Find someone who</b>


Prepare a two- column table with Yes/No questions and name.


Let Ss go around the class and ask other Ss what they used to do when
they were small. If the answer is Yes, write his/her name in the table.
The winner is the first one who completes the name column.


<b>Are you going to...</b>


<i>Take an English class in the evening?</i>
<i>Spend summer holiday on the beach?</i>


<i>What the game show</i><b>Who wants to be millionaire on VTV3?</b>


<i>Go to the cinema?</i>
...



Whole class


5
minutes


<b>pronunciation</b>
<b>presentation1</b>


Demonstrate the sounds / / and / / by pronouncing them clearly and
slowly.


Help Ss to distinguish these two sounds.
Instruct the way to pronounce:


/ / First pronounce the sound / / then put your tongue forward and
up a little.


/ / is a long sound.


/ / first pronounce the sound / / but make it short.
/ / is a short sound


Whole class


5
minutes


<b>practice1</b>



Play the tape and ask them to repeat.


Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly in front of the class.
Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.


Introduce peer correction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Go around the class and provide help if necessary.
5


minutes <b>grammar and vocabularypresentation 2</b>


Explain future forms


<b>Will </b>


<b>Will </b>expresses an intention or decision made at the moment of
speaking :


<i>I' ll give you my phone number. Ring me tonight.</i>


<b>Going to </b>


<b>Going to </b>expresses an intension or decision thought about before the
moment of speaking. It expresses a plan:


<i>We' re going to have holiday in Sam Son this summer.</i>


Whole class



self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing: November 14th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 35</sub>


Test yourself B


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: competitions, illiteracy, volunteer work.
- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book….



<b>III. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

13
minutes


Listening


- Sts read through the listening part then listen to the tape about the test.
- Sts choose the correct answers .


- T plays the tape again then checks the answers with the class.
- Give final feedback.


KEY:


reading Oxford


Location 1. 50 miles to the west of


London 6. in central England


Population 2. 120.000 inhabitants/


people 7. 90.000 people


Noted for 3. market town
4. biscuits factory
5. computer industry



8. university
9. car factory
10. Cowley Road


Individual work


13
minutes


Reading


- Sts read the passage then answer the questions follow.
- Sts check the answers with the partners


- T checks and give corrections in front of the class.


KEY: 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T


Individual work
and pair work


13
minutes


Pronunciation and grammar


A. Sts listen then tick in the right box, paying attention to the pronunciation of
the underlined part of the word.



- T reads the words loudly and clearly.
- T calls some Sts to read the answers.


- T checks with the whole class and gives feedback.


KEY: B. Sts complete the sentences , using the right forms of the infinitive.
- T goes around to check their answers.


- T asks Sts to share their answers with the partners.
- T gives the final answers key.


KEY:



1.by 2. for 3. there 4. which/ that 5. the


6. the 7. a/ per 8. by 9. it 10. be


Individual work
and pair work


6 minutes


Writing.


- Sts do the part at home.


- T gives them the form of a writing about the party.


- Sts use the questions in their books to make the plan of the writing.
_ Sts may ask the teacher more information or structures before writing.



<i><b>Example:</b></i>


Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...


_ ...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Date of preparing: November 24th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 36</sub>

The second written test

(<b>45 minutes</b>)


<b>I. Aims of the test:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: special education, technology and you, an
excursion.


- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.
- Checking the vocabularies, structures, and pronunciation.


.


………
<b>II. Organization</b>:



Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


11A1
11A3
11A4


…….. November 2007 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
_ ...
_...
...


………
………
………
………


………
………


...


………


...
...
...
...


_...
...


Date of preparing: November 24th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 37</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>I. Aim of the test checking:</b>


- Find and Correct Sts’ mistakes


- Retell them about the uses of the structures that they were not correct.


<b>II. Organization</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


11A1
11A3
11A4



...November 2007 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>III. Procedure: (123)</b>


Time Steps Work


arrangement


7 minutes


Listening


- T reads or plays the tape again and stops at the keywords.
- T writes the missing words on the board or asks sts to write on


the board if they can.


- T comments the sts’ s papers.


<b>Keys: </b>



1. 2. 3. 4. 5.


Whole class


7 minutes


Pronunciation


- Call on sts to go to the board to read and write the pronunciation of the
word to find out the word pronounce different from the others.


- T gives feedback
KEY:


6. C 7. B


8. C 9. B


10. D


Individual work


10 minutes


Grammar


...
...
...


...
...
...
...


KEY:


11. A 12. A 13. D 14. A


15. B 16. C 17. B 18. A


19. A 20. A 21. B 22. B


23. C 24. A


36. c 37. C 38. D 39. A 40. C


Whole class


Reading


- T asks sts to read the passage once more time to answer the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

10 minutes


25. 26. 27.


28. 29. 30.


- Sts translate the passage into Vietnamese to understand the content of


the passage.


9 minutes


Writing


T asks Sts rechoose the sentences then explain them.
T check in front of the class.


KEY: Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...
...
...


Date of preparing : November 20th 2007 period 38

unit 7 - lesson 1 - reading


<b>I. Objectives :</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


-be updated with names of some popular TV programmes such as Quiz Show, Portrait of
life…


-be able to talk about their favourite programmes.



<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


<b>III. Organization:</b>


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


December 2007


IV. procedure :



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


5’


<b>warm </b>–<b> up</b>
<b>Jumbled words</b>


Give 10 words whose letter are in the wrong order.
Note Ss that all the words are forms of mass media.


Ask Ss to work in group and rearrange them in good order to make the
right words.



<i> 1. enslieisov </i> <i>television</i>
<i> 2. rwepeapns newspaper</i>
<i> 3. idora radio</i>
<i> 4. agenmiza magazine</i>


<i> 5. …</i>


Explain the term mass media.


<i><b>Mass media</b> or <b>mass communication</b> refer to public institutions that </i>
<i>report news and other stories. Mass media also keep people updated.</i>
Give examples for each types of mass media.


E.g:


Newspaper: Nhan Dan, Lao Dong…


Group work


10’


Before you read


Have Ss work in pairs: Ask and answer the following questions:
<i>When do you often watch TV?</i>


<i>How many channels are there in our national TV?</i>
<i>How many hours per week do you watch TV?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

Gather ideas and give some background information about TV channels


in Vietnam (See Supplements for more information):


<i>VTV1: combination of Politics, Economics and Entertainment</i>
<i>VTV2: Science and Education</i>


<i>VTV3: Entertainment</i>


<i>VTV4: For the overseas Vietnamese</i>
<i>VTV5: For the Ethnic minority groups</i>


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


Give Vietnamese equivalences for some TV programmes
<i>Population and Development: Dân số và Phát triển</i>
<i>TV series: Phim truyền hình dài tập</i>


<i>Folk songs: Dân ca nhạc cổ</i>
<i>News headlines: Điểm tin chính</i>
<i>Weather Forecast: Dự báo thời tiết</i>
<i>Quiz Show: Trò chơi truyền hình</i>
<i>Portrait of Life: Chân dung cuộc sống</i>
<i>Documentary: Phim tài liƯu</i>


<i>Wildlife World: ThÕ giíi thiªn nhiªn hoang d·</i>
<i>Around the World: Vßng quanh thÕ giíi</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Advising</b></i>


Divide the class into two teams. Team A says what they want to see.


Team B gives advice on what programmes team B should watch.
E.g:


Team A<i>: I love seeing animals and plants.</i>
Team B: <i>You should watch the <b>Wildlife World</b>.</i>


Team A: <i>I want to know whether it is going to rain tomorrow</i>.
Team B: <i>You should watch the <b>Weather Forecast</b>.</i>


6’


7’


7’


While you read


<b>Task 1 </b>–<i><b>Matching</b></i>


Ask Ss to read three TV programme schedules and do Task 1: Match
the word in A which appear in the reading passage with their defini in
B.


Have Ss compare ang discuss their answer with a friend.
Further explain and give correct answer:


<i>1.</i> <i>c (A cartoon is a film made by photographing a series of </i>
<i>changing drawing)</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>a (A drama is a play for the theatre, television or radio)</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>d (A comedy is a film or play that is intended to be funny, </i>


<i>usually with a happy ending)</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>b (A documentary is a film or a television programme giving </i>
<i>facts about something)</i>


<b>Task 2 </b>–<b> True or false</b>


Tell Ss to read the programmes carefully and decide whether the
statements are true (T) or false (F). Correct the false information.
Ask Ss to explain their answer by giving evidence in the reading
passage.


Check the answers in the front of the class as a whole.
Give correct answer:


<i>1.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>T</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>F (The Nature of Language is the documentary programme </i>
<i>at 15:15 on VTV3.)</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>T</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>F (VTV1 starts at 5:35 and the last programme starts at </i>
<i>23:30)</i>


<b>Task 3 - Answering Questions</b>



Ask Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer the questions in the book
basing on the information in the reading passage.


Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class
Feedback and give correct answer:


<i>1.</i> <i>There are five films on.</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>At 9:00 a.m., 12:00 at noon, 7:00 p.m., 11 p.m. on VTV1 and </i>
<i>7:00 p.m. on VTV3</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>VTV2</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<i>5.</i> <i>(You should watch) VTV1</i>
<i>6.</i> <i>The Football</i>


7’


After you read


Keep Ss in pairs and ask them to tell their partner about one of the TV
programmes they like watching best and explain why.


Call on some Ss to give short talks on the given topic.
Give suggested answer:


<i>I like Game show <b>The price is right</b> most because it is very interesting, </i>
<i>easy to play. Besides the reward for the winner is valuable. Another </i>
<i>reason I like this game show is the MS. Mr. Luu Minh Vu is humorous </i>
<i>and very intelligent</i>…



Pair work


3’ wrapping


Summarise the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : November 20th 2007 period 39

unit 7 - lesson 2 - speaking


<b>I. Objectives </b>:



By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the differences and similarities of some
popular types of the mass media.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....
III. Organization:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


December 2007


IV. procedure :



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


10’


warm - up


<b>Noughts and Crosses</b>


Draw a table containing 9 words in each cell.


Divide class into two groups: Noughts (O) and Crosses (X).



Ask Ss to choose the word in the cell and make sentence with that word.
A correct sentences with the given word will give one O or X. The
group with 3 O or X vertically, horizontally, or even diagonally first will


b

e winner.



<i>newspaper</i> Internet cartoon


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<i>magazines</i> <i>television</i> <i>news</i>


<i>radio</i> <i>book</i> <i>drama</i>


Note: The sentences must be grammatically correct and make scene.


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


orally (adv<i>): spoken by mouth</i>
visually (adv): <i>seen by eyes</i>
aurally (adv): <i>heard by ears</i>


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Sentence modelling</b></i>


Ask Ss to make sentences with above words. Make sure Ss understand
the meaning and the use of the words


5’


<b>Presentation</b>



Ask Ss to work in pairs and decide which items are types of the mass
media.


Notice Ss to refer to the definition of the mass media.


Call on some pairs to explain their answer in front of the class.
Check the answer in front of the class as a whole.


Give correct answer:
<i>Television</i>


<i>Radio</i>
<i>Newspaper</i>
<i>The Internet</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

15’



12’


3’


<b>Practice</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You have discussed some popular types of the mass media. As you </i>
<i>know, each types has its own features. Now, you work in pairs and </i>
<i>work out what feature(s) the types of the mass media have in common </i>
<i>and what main features each of them has.</i>



Ask Ss to work in pairs and carry out the activity using the cues in the
book.


Go around the class and provide help when necessary.


Call on some pairs to explain the answers in front of the class.
Feedback and give suggested answers:


<b>The mass</b>
<b>media</b>


<b>provide/deliver information</b>
<b>and</b>


<b>entertainment</b>


<i>The radio</i>


<i>provide information and </i>
<i>entertainment orally (through </i>
<i>mouth)</i>


<i>receive information aurally </i>
<i>(through ears)</i>


<i>Newspapers</i>


<i>present information and </i>



<i>entertainment visually (through </i>
<i>eyes)</i>


<i>receive information visually </i>
<i>(through eyes)</i>


<i>Television</i>


<i>present information and </i>
<i>entertainment orally (through </i>
<i>mouth) and visually (through </i>
<i>eyes)</i>


<i>get information aurally (through </i>
<i>ears) and visually (through eyes</i>)


<b>further practice</b>


Have Ss work in groups and talk about different types of the mass
media.


<i>Note:</i> T may use the question in the book or the following:


<i>Which types of the mass media do you usually get information from?</i>
<i>Which one do you like most? Why?</i>


<i>Which type of the mass media is developing and will developing in the </i>
<i>future?</i>


<i>…</i>



Gather ideas and have final thoughts on the topic


<b>Wrapping</b>


Summarize the main points.
Assign homework


Pair work


group work


Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : November 27th 2007 period 40

unit 7 - lesson 3 - listening



<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to better their ability to listen to new editions through
Gap-filling exercise.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....
III. Organization:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1


10 A 5 September 2007
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’


warm – up


<b>Guessing game</b>


Provide three clues about the word <i><b>News/News Broadcast</b></i>. Ss have to
guess the word in the first clue, they get 30 points, 20 points in the
second clue and 10 points in the third clue.



<i>1. It is one of the radio programmes.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<i><b>2.</b></i> <i>It is broadcasts daily and live from radio station.</i>


<i><b>3.</b></i> <i>It updates you with the latest information, current affairs </i>
<i>domestically and internationally.</i>


<b>Answer:</b>


<i><b>News/News Broadcast</b></i>


5’


before you listen


<b>Q&A</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer the question:
<i>1.</i> <i>How often do you listen the radio?</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>How many hours per week do you listen to it?</i>
3. <i>What programme do you like listening to and why?</i>
Gather ideas and introduce the listening.


News broadcast is a popular programme on the radio. Today you will
listen to a short news edition. You listen to it and do the tasks assigned.





Pair work


7’


10’


8’


<b>while you listen</b>
<b>Task 1 </b>–<i><b>Ticking the words</b></i>


Explicit the items of the news. (2 item)


Ask Ss to do task 1: Listen to the two radio news stories and tick the
right column under News story 1 and News story 2


Play the tape once or twice.


Check the answers in front of the class as a whole.
Give correct answers:


News story 1 News story 2


Healthy Ö


strong Ö


young Ö


cloudy Ö



highest Ö


wonderful Ö


fine Ö


wonderful Ö


fine Ö


<b>Task 2 </b>–<i><b>Gap-filling</b></i>


Let Ss read the two news stories carefully and have the guess of the
missing words.


Play the tape and ask Ss to fill in the missing words.
Notice Ss to catch the exact words(s) for each blank.
Call on some Ss to read completed stories.


Ask for comments from Ss.
Pause the tape when necessary.
Feedback and give correct answers:


<b>News story 1</b>


<i>1.</i> <i>has caused floods</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>have left their home</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>have risen</i>



<i>4.</i> <i>two meters</i>
<i>5.</i> <i>has stopped</i>
<i>6.</i> <i>cloudy</i>
<i>7.</i> <i>strong wind</i>


<b>News story 2</b>


<i>1.</i> <i>twenty-third</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>4,418</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>California</i>
<i>4.</i> <i>wonderful</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>young and healthy</i>


<b>Task 3 </b>–<i><b>Answering questions</b></i>


Ask Ss to work in pairs and answer the questions in the book.
Note: Ss are encouraged to do the task without looking back to the
stories on page 77. However, Ss cam look back if necessary.
Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.
Feedback and give correct answers:


<i>1. Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country during </i>
<i>the night.</i>


<i>2. Because rivers have risen.</i>


<i>3. The old woman has climbed Mount Whitney twenty-three </i>
<i>times.</i>



<i>4. Because it has kept her young and healthy.</i>
Tape script


Individual
work


Individual
work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

<i>The time is 7 o clock and here is the news summary.</i>’


<i>Heavy rain during the night has caused floods all over the country</i>
<i>today. Many people have left their home because rivers have risen.</i>
<i>Some roads in the north-west are under two meters of water. The rain</i>
<i>has stopped at the moment, but it s still cloudy and there s a strong</i>’ ’
<i>wind. Because of the bad weather people can t go out to work.</i>’


<i>A ninety-year-old woman has climbed Mount Whitney in California for</i>
<i>the twenty-third times. At 4418 meters. Mount Whitney is the highest</i>
<i>mountain in California. The woman says the view from the top is</i>
<i>wonderful. She also says that the mountain has kept her young and</i>
<i>healthy. In spite of her old age, the woman tries to climb the mountain</i>
<i>very often.</i>


5’


<b>After you listen</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups and use their own words to tell other members
about one of the two news stories.



Call on some Ss to present the story in front of the class.
Ask for comments from other Ss.


Make necessary corrections.


Group work



3’


<b>Wrapping</b>


Summaries the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...



...
...


Date of preparing : November 28th 2007 period 41


unit 7 - lesson4- writing


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of
television and other types of mass media.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....
III. Organization:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


December 2007


IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

7’ <b>1.</b> Prepare a list of reviewed vocabulary words about mass
media such as <i>newspaper, television…</i>


<b>2.</b> Write each words on two small pieces of paper. That means
writing the words twice, once on each paper.


<b>3.</b> Organize the pieces like bundles, 2 bundles, 2 sets of
identical words.


<b>4.</b> Divide the class into 2 team. Get them to make creative team
names.


<b>5.</b> Distribute each list of words to both teams. Every student on
each team should have a paper. Both teams have the same
words.


<b>6.</b> When you call a word, 2 students should stand up, one from
each team. The students must then run to the blackboard and
race to write a sentence using their words.


The winner is the one with a correct and clearly written sentence.


Whole class


5’


<b>presentation</b>


Implicit the meaning of advantage and disadvantage by analyzing the
examples:



<i>Television helps us to learn more about the world.</i>
<i>Television makes us passive.</i>


<i>Which sentence says good about television? Which one is bad?</i>
Ask Ss to read about the advantages and disadvantages o television.
Have Ss underline the key words of each idea.


Go around the class and provide help when necessary.


Make sure Ss understand all the advantages and disadvantages
mentioned in the book.


Whole class


13’ <b>practice</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of
the mass media and write them down in the column.


Let Ss choose of the three types of mass media to discuss.
Encourage Ss to find the ideas related to the topics.
Ask Ss to share the ideas with other pairs.


Give suggested answers:


Radio


<b>Advantages</b> <b>Disadvantages</b>



It provide you hourly- updated
news and information.


It is convenient because you can
listen to it almost everywhere.
It make our life easier and
enjoyable. It also releases stress.


It only provides information
aurally.


It can be boring because we can’t
watch films or sports
programmes.


Newspaper


It provide news and current
affairs updatedly


It’s very mobile because we can
bring them along everywhere we
go.


It’s cheap. A Vietnamese daily
newspaper costs only


approximately 2000 VND





It’s less updated than other
kinds of media as there is no
more information until the next
edition.


The text and pictures are not
moving so it is as not exciting as
other kinds of media which have
vivid pictures and live broadcasts.
It may not be available
everywhere due to bad condition
of transportation.


The Internet


It is a rich source of information.
We can access to Internet and get
all the information we need. This
is impossible for other types of
media like radio or TV.


It is great tool of entertainment.


It make us confused when there
is too much information. Thus, it
is difficult to find the necessary
information.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

We can play game and listen to


music online with great pleasure.
It is a very good way to study.
We can register for online
courses and study with the help
of modern aids such as speakers,
keyboard,…


It damage our healthy due to
prolonged and inappropriate use.


15’


<b>further practice</b>


Ask Ss to write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of
one of the mass media discussed in task 2.


Let Ss work independently and write under time pressure.
Introduce peer correction if time allowed.


Pick up some writings to correct in front of the class as a whole.
Give suggested writing:


<i>Updated information, convenience and stress relief are three major</i>
<i>advantages that radio bring us. Firstly, radio keeps us updated with</i>
<i>latest information. The news which is broadcast live hourly helps us</i>
<i>understand current events around the world. Secondly, unlike other</i>
<i>types of the mass media, radio is easy to use. We can listen to the radio</i>
<i>almost everywhere with little cost and great convenience. Lastly, radio</i>
<i>helps us to release the stress that we suffer from work and study. Music</i>


<i>and entertainment programmes on the radio are effective ways to make</i>
<i>us feel happy and refreshes after a hard working day. In conclusion,</i>
<i>radio has a lot of advantages that make our life easier and more</i>
<i>enjoyable.</i>


Individual
work


5’


<b>wrapping</b>


Summarize the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Date of preparing : November 29th 2007 period 42

unit 7 - lesson 5 - language focus


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:


- pronoun the sounds /eI/, /aI/ and /ÉI/ clearly and correctly.


- master the use of the present perfect tense and use <i>because of</i> and <i>in spite of</i> appropriately.
II. Materials:


Textbook, whiteboard markers, ....


III. Organization:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1


10 A 5 December 2007
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


5’


warm – up



<b>Categorising</b>


Give out 10 to 15 words.


Ask Ss to work in pairs or groups and decide which words go with


<i><b>since</b></i> or <i><b>for.</b></i>


Suggested words:


<i>1990, three months, two weeks,…</i>


Group work


5’


<b>pronunciation</b>
<b>presentation 1</b>


Demonstrate the sounds /eI/, /aI/, and /ÉI/ by pronouncing
them clearly and slowly.


Help Ss to distinguish these two sounds.
Instruct the way to pronounce:


/eI/ has two sounds: e and I


First make the sound e. Now make it longer eee.
Then add I. This is very short.



eeeI


/aI/ has two sounds: a and I
First practice the sound a


This is a long sound and then add I. This is very short.
aaaI


/ÉI/ has two sounds: É and I


First practice the sound É. Now make it longer ÉÉÉ.
Then add I. This is very short.


ÉÉÉI


Whole class


5’


<b>practice 2</b>


Play the tape and ask them to repeat.


Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly in front of the class.
Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.


Introduce peer correction.


Go around the class and provide help when necessary.



Pair work


5’


<b>grammar and vocabulary</b>
<b>presentation 2</b>


Review the form and the use of the present tense.


<i>Note</i>: Ss have been familiar with the present perfect so ask Ss to present
the form and the uses of this tense. If Ss have difficulty, let s answer
questions about this tense.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

7’


<b> practice 2</b>


Ask Ss to do exercise 1 independently: Complete the letter, using the
present perfect of the verbs in the box.


have Ss compare their answers with s friend.


Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class.
Feedback and give correct answers:


<i>Dear Tom,</i>


<i>Here I am in New York! I <b>(1) Have been </b>here for two weeks now and</i>
<i>it s very exciting.</i>’



<i>My friend, Nancy (I meet her in London in 1992)<b>(2)has lived </b>in New</i>
<i>York for seven years, so she knows all about it. I <b>(3) have met</b> a lot of</i>
<i>people and I <b>(4) have done </b>all the things that tourists usually do. I <b>(5)</b></i>
<i><b>have had</b> a hot lunch in China town. I <b>(6) have taken </b>a trip to the</i>
<i>Statue of Liberty.</i>


<i>I even <b>(7) have </b>watched a ball game on T.V!</i>
<i>Back on the 19th</i>


<i>See you later,</i>
<i>Bob</i>


Individual
work


7’


<b>Practice 3</b>


Ask Ss to do exercise 2 in pairs: Complete the sentences using<i> for, </i>
<i>since or ago</i>


<i>Note:</i> This is probably an easy exercise so let Ss do it orally.


Call on some Ss to read and explain their answers in front of the class.
Give correct answers:


1. Lan and Minh have lived in Ho Chi Minh city since 1999
2. Hoa and Quan quarreled with each other some time ago.
3. The house is very dirty. We haven’t cleaned it for ages.


4. We haven’t had a good meal for three weeks.


5. Since Christmas, the weather has been quite good.
6. They have known each other for a long time.
7. They first met a long time ago.


8. They arrived home ten minutes ago.
9. It’s two years since I last saw Quoc Anh.
10. How long is it since you last saw Linda?


Individual
work


3’


<b>presentation 3</b>


Explain the use and the difference of <i>because of </i>and <i>in spite of.</i>
<i>Because of</i> shows the cause.


<i>In spite of </i>shows the confession


make sure Ss understand the difference between <i>because of </i>and <i>in spite</i>
<i>of.</i>


Whole class


8’


<b>practice 4</b>



Have Ss do exercise 3: Complete the sentences. using the information
in the box.


Ask Ss to compare the answers and discuss them with a friend.
Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.
Make necessary corrections.


Feedback and give correct answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>Because of the cold weather, we kept the fire burning all</i>
<i>day.</i>


<i>In spite of the cold weather, we all wore shorts.</i>


2. <i>Because of his illness, he had to cancel the appointment.</i>
<i>In spite of his illness, he managed to come to school.</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>Because of the large crowds, we could not see what was</i>
<i>going on.</i>


<i>In spite of the large crowds, we were enough seats everyone.</i>
<i>4.</i> <i>Because the meat shortage, everyone is living on beans.</i>
<i>In spite of the meat shortage, we have managed to get some beef.</i>
<i>5.</i> <i>Because of the bad condition of the house, the council</i>


<i>demolished it.</i>


<i>In spite of the bad condition of the house, they enjoyed living</i>
<i>there</i>



Individual
work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing: November 28th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 43</sub>


Revision(p1)


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b>Write a description of a celebration.


<b>II. Materials:</b>



- Handout, text book….


<b>III. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7 minutes


Warm up


- Ask sts the steps to write a daily life
- Write the answers on the board.


- T checks and give them more information about a daily life.


getting up having breakfast


going to school


<b>daily life</b>



]




watching TV playing sports going to bed ...
...



- T gives feedback.


Group work


10
minutes


Pre- writing


- T gives sts some information about a daily life
- get up: 5.30 a.m


- have breakfast: 6.00


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

...


1.pm – 4.30 pm: do the afternoon work


5.00pm : play tennis at Trung Vuong tennis club
6.00pm : come back home,


- have a bath,
- have dinner
- watch TV


Sometimes, Read newspapers or go and see his parents for some tea.
10. 30pm: go to bed.


Group work



20
minutes


While- writing


- T goes around to help sts to do the task.


- Sts write the letters in 10 minutes, based on the outlines they have produced.
- T asks sts to work in pairs, exchange their descriptions and correct each other.
- T goes around to help.


Individual
work, pair work
and whole class


5 minutes Post- writing


- T chooses one or two descriptions to read in front of the class.


- T elicits comments from the class and give correct answers. whole class


3 minutes


Wrapping up


- T summarizes the main points of the lesson.


- For homework: T asks Sts to revise their letters according to their peer’s
suggestions and submit for making in the next lesson.



whole class


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...
...


Date of preparing: November 29th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 44</sub>


Revision(p2)


(Reading)


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> - </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, guessing meaning in
context.


- Use the information they have read to discuss the topic.


<b> </b>


<b>II. Materials:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>III. Organization</b>:



Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


.December 2007 .


……… ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>III.Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5
minutes


Warm- up



<b>Check the old lesson</b>


_ T leads to the new lesson


individual work


10
minutes


Pre- reading


Read the passage :


<b> </b><i>Some years ago, Hoa, one of my friends was studying English at an university </i>
<i>in Thai Nguyen. One evening she phoned to tell me that what she want to do was </i>
<i>travel around the world. She tried to work hard to earn money for her dream. In </i>
<i>her free time, she washed the dishes at a food stall near her university. She </i>
<i>learned some more languages such as French, Chinese, Japanese and so on. A </i>
<i>year ago, with her little money, she went to China. She bought a lot of things </i>
<i>there, so her money wasn t enough for her to go to the other countries. She came </i>’
<i>back home and continued to harbour her dream.</i>




- Read after the teacher


- T calls some Sts to read the words aloud.


- T repeats the words if the Sts don’t read correctly.
- Using drop out and remember method to check.


- T gives feedback.


Individual work
Whole class


5
minutes


While- reading


<b>1. Task 1: </b>A :Choose T/ F statements:


1. The writer phoned her friend one evening to tell her about his dream.
2. She wanted to work abroad.


3. She washed the clothes to earn money.
4. She only learned English and Chinese.
5. She had much money when she went abroad.
- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.
- T gets Sts to check their answers with a peer.


- T calls some sts to write their answers on the board,
the others read their answers,


then ask them to explain their choices.
- T gives corrective feedback.


Group work


9


minutes


<b>2. Task 2: Answer the questions:</b>


1. Where did she study English?
2. How did she do for her dream?
3. Did she learn Japanese?


- Sts read the text again if they cannot do the task without reading the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

passage.


- First, Sts should skim the 3 questions to understand them.


- Sts underlined the key words to decide what information they need to find
in the text.


- Then they should go back to the passage and locate the key words in the
passage.


- Sts check the answers with their friends.


- T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers
- T gives feedback and correct answers.


KEY:


<i>1. in Thai Nguyen</i>


<i>2. She tried to work hard to earn money for her dream.</i>


<i>3. Yes, she did</i>


8
minutes


Post- reading




<b>Task 3: retell the task </b>


- T goes around to check and offer help.


- Sts share your pair’ s opinions with the others.
- T calls on some Sts to read their translations.
- T gives corrective feedback.


Group work


2
minutes


Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
T asks Sts to retell the text.


Self- evaluation:


………


………...
...
...
...


………
………...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Revision(p3)


(Grammar)


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b>Reviewing condition type 1, used to. The+ adj, infinitive, gerund, tenses


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, sts's book(P1- P2<T. Anh nang cao 11>)


<b>III. Organization</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….December 2007……….



...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7
minutes


Warm- up


<b>Check the old lesson: </b>Ask sts to write the forms of the condition type 1, used to.
The+ adj, infinitive, gerund, tenses


_ T leads to the new lesson


individual work


10
minutes



<b>I</b>.<b> Find out the mistakes by underlining A, B, C, or D ( 1®)</b>


1.Before going to bed, Mrs Tuyet usually read something or watches TV
A B C D
2. From then on, they worked together by their research.


A B C D


3. He has to rides his bike in narrow and crowded streets to get to school.
A B C D


4. Nobody are absent today.
A B C


5. Nam is interested in learning English because it is a international language.


A B C D


- T gets Sts to check their answers with a peer.


- T calls some sts to write their answers on the board,
the others read their answers,


then ask them to explain their choices.
- T gives feedback.


<b>Exercise2: </b>


<b>Choose the correct word to complete the sentences by circling A, B, C, or D: </b>



1. I am ...pupil.


A. the B. a C. an D. one


2. I’m ... 15 years old this years.


A. not B. no C. yes D. none


3. Running ...good for your health.


A. was B. is C. are D. be


4. He ... not like eating sweets.


A. does B. do C. is D.are


5. ...are you from?
I’m from Vietnam.


A. what B. why C. which D.where


6. She...our teacher.


A. is B. are C. am D. be


7. This key is used...opening the door.


A. to B. for C. on D. at



Individual work
Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

8. He or his brother ...watching T V now.


A. are B. is C. was D.were


9. ... I have time, I’ll read that book.


A. why B. what C. When D.who


10. We go to school ... bikes.


A. since B. on C. for D. by


- Sts check the answers with their friends.


- T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers
- T gives feedback and correct answers.


10
minutes


<b>3. Task 3: </b>


1.

She is bored ……….. doing the same thing everyday.


A. of B. with C. on D. at


2. I can’t remember when I started ……….. this shirt.



<i><b> A. wear</b></i> <i><b>B. to wearing C.wearing</b></i> <i><b>D. wore</b></i>


3. ………. is his hobby.


A. go shopping B. go shop C. going shopping D. to shop
4. I ………. play with dolls when I was small.


A. enjoyed B. hated C. started D. used to


5. We walked for ten kilometers and then we stopped……… a rest.


A. to have B. have C. having D. has


6. I want you to leave me………..


A. myself B. alone C. lone D. my own


7. Many people in the world are fond……….. football.


A. of B. with C. in D. for


8. I hate ……… the dirty dishes after a meal.


A. wash B. washing C .to wash D. to be


washing


9.There…………..many kangaroos and koalas in wild forests in Australia.



A. are B. is C.be D.have


10.She……….smoking two months ago.


A. stops B.stoped C.stopping D.stopped


11. Many great opera………..of the world can be heard in the Sydney Opera.


A. singers B. singing C.singer D.sing


12.Sky-diving is dangerous……….great fun.


A. so B. and C.but D.for


13.My parents can’t………..seeing me at home all day.


<i><b> A.stop</b></i> <i><b>B.stand</b></i> <i><b>C.start</b></i> <i><b>D.hate</b></i>


14……….weekend, I often go fishing with my family.


A.Over B.At C.in D.for


- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.


- T gives corrective feedback.


Group work


10


minutes


Reported speech, pronouns




<b>Task 4: Write into reported speech:</b>


1. "You have got to lend me some money! Oh, please"


...
...


2. "Give me your books"


...
...


3. "I will buy you an ice-cream"


...
...


4. "Please don't smoke in my car"


...
...


5. "Would you like to have a drink with me?"



...
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- Sts share your pair’ s opinions with the others.
- T calls on some Sts to read their translations.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

- T gives corrective feedback.


4
minutes


Homework


- T summarizes the main points of the lesson.
T asks Sts to revise the grammar by heart.


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...


………


………

...



...




Date of preparing: November 29th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 46</sub>


Revision(p4)


(Grammar)


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b>Reviewing condition type 1, used to. The+ adj, infinitive, gerund, tenses


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, sts's book(P1- P2<T. Anh nang cao 11>)


<b>III. Organization</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….December 2007……….


...


………


………
………
………
………


………
<b>V. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7
minutes


Warm- up


<b>Check the old lesson: </b>Ask sts to write the forms of the condition type 1, used to.
The+ adj, infinitive, gerund, tenses


_ T leads to the new lesson


individual work


10


Task 1 : multiple choice


10-Mary suggested………….to the cinema.


A. go B. going C. to go D. to be going
11- She apologised…………..being late.


A. for B. of C. from D. on



12-“ Don’t forget to post the letter!”- He…………me to post the letter.
A. reminded B. asked C. advised D. invited
13-“ I will write to you.” Mary said to me.


A. Mary said to me she will write to me. C. Mary promised she to write
to you


B. Mary promised to write to you D. Mary promised to write to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

minutes 14-Would you mind………….for a moment?


A. waiting B. have waiting C. to wait D. to be waiting
15-He doesn’t spend much time ………his lessons.


A. preparing B. to prepare C. prepare D. be prepared
16-“ I can’t let you watch TV” Ann’s mother said to her.Ann’s mother
prevented her………


A. to watch TV B. of watching TV C. from watching TV
D. from watch TV


- T gets Sts to check their answers with a peer.


- T calls some sts to write their answers on the board,
the others read their answers,


then ask them to explain their choices.
- T gives feedback.


<b>Exercise2: </b>



<b>Choose the correct word to complete the sentences by circling A, B, C, or D: </b>


1. ...what time do you get up ?


A. at B. in C. on D. for


2. We use internet ...connecting the world.


A. on B. for C. at D. by


3. I will cook something ... rice , meat..


A. such as B. so as C. like D. is


4. I don't like looking the chidren...


A. crys B. crying C. cry D.cries
5. Look ! Mr Tuan is...


A. sing B. sang C. sings D.singing


6. Learning English...useful.


A. is B. be C. are D.were


7. This is the pupil... is our monitor.


A. who B. whose C. which D.what



8. The police ...wear uniforms .


A. have to B. has to C. can D.may


9. A person who is the head of a school is a...


A. pupil B. teacher C. worker D.headmaster


10. My brother usually gets up ... 6.00 a. m.


A. for B. at C. on D. in


.


- Sts check the answers with their friends.


- T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers
- T gives feedback and correct answers.


Whole class


pair work


10
minutes


<b>3. Task 3: </b>

Write into reported speech:



1. "You should give up smoking"



...
...


2. "Don't eat that food"


...
...


3. "Nam is a teacher of Chinese"


...
...


4. "I won't do it again"


...
...


5. "Could you lend me youe bike for a day?"
- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.


- T gives corrective feedback.


Group work


4


Homework



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

minutes T asks Sts to revise the grammar by heart.


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...


………
………...
...


Date of preparing: December 10th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 47</sub>

The final written test

(<b>45 minutes</b>)


<b>I. Aims of the test:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: mass media, the story of my village.
- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


- Checking the vocabularies, structures, and pronunciation.
.


………
<b>II. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils



10A1


10A5


……..December 2007 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………


III.


Self- evaluation:


_...
... ....
...


_ ...
...


_...
...
...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

Date of preparing : December 5th 2007 period 48

unit 8



lesson 1- reading


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


-better their reading skill through vocabulary matching and Table completion exercises.
-enlarge vocabulary about country life such as <i>bumper crops, cash crops, brick houses, </i>
<i>straw, mud….</i>


II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1


10 A 5 December 2007
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’



warm – up


<b>Networks</b>


Ask Ss to work in group of three or four and make s list of word related
to the country.


The group with the longest list will be winner.


Group work


10’


<b>before you read</b>
<b>Picture description</b>


Have Ss work in pairs and discuss the question in the book.
Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.
Feedback and give suggested answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>The farmers are having the crop.</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>They are working very hard.</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>It s a good/bumper crop.</i>’


<i>4.</i> <i>Good farming methodds, good varieties, modern technology</i>
<i>used, people work hard…</i>


<i>Note:</i> T may ask other questions to make full use of the picture. Some
simpler questions may be used:



<i>What do you see in the picture?</i>
<i>Who are they?</i>


<i>What are they using?</i>
<i>.</i>


<i>…</i>


<b>Vocabulary pre-teach</b>


straw (n): <i>dry cut stalks of various cereals</i> (r¬m)
mud (n): wet, soft soil (bïn)


technical high school (n): trêng trung häc kÜ thuật dạy nghề.
farming methods (n): phơng pháp canh tác


brick houses (n<i>): houses made of brick</i> (nhµ ngãi)
thanks to (prep)<i>: owing to, because of</i> (nhê cã)


<b>Checking technique</b>
<i><b>Rub out and remember</b></i>


Write all the new words and their meanings on the board.


Rub out all the words in English and kept their Vienamese meanings.
When all the words are rubbed, ask Ss to look at the Vienamese
meanings and recall all the English words.


Pair work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

6’


6’


<b>Set the scenes</b>


You are going to read a passage about life changes in the country. You
read it and do the following tasks:


<b>Task 1 </b>–<b> Vocabulary Matching</b>


Ask Ss to raed the passage and match the words which all appear in the
passage in A with their definitions in B.


Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of the words in the context.
Have Ss compare their answers with a friend.


Call on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class.
Make necessary corrections.


Give correct answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>b (have just enough money to pay for the things that you</i>
<i>need)</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>d (having to have many things that you do not have)</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>a (making one s life better)</i>’


<i>4.</i> <i>e (good crops)</i>



<i>5.</i> <i>c (crops to be sold, not for use by the people who grow it)</i>
Give Vietnamese equivalents if necessary:


<i>1.</i> <i>kiếm tằn tiện đủ sống</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>thiếu thốn nhiều thứ</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>cải thiện cuộc sống</i>
<i>4.</i> <i>vụ mùa bội thu</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>cây trồng để bán và thu lợi nhuận</i>


<b>Task 2 </b>–<b> Table Completion</b>


Ask Ss to scan the passage to get specific information to complete the
table.


Let Ss study the table carefully before doing the task.
Go around the class and provide help when necssary.
Tell Ss to discuss the answers with a friend.


Check the answers in front of the class as a whole.
Give correct answers:


Areas of change Before Now


houses made of straw and


mud made of bricks


radio and TV few families had a



radio or a TV set many families had aradio or a TV set


farming methods old new


crops poor good/bumper


travel


<b>Task 3 </b>–<b> Answering Questions</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs: Raed the passage again and answer the
questions in Task 3.


Tell Ss to underline the information that support the aswers.
Have Ss compare their answers with another pair.


Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.
Give feedback and correct answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>It was poor and simple.</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>Because they hope that with an education of science and</i>
<i>technology their children could find a way of bettering their</i>
<i>lives.</i>


<i>3.</i> <i>They introduced new farming methods which resulted in</i>
<i>bumper crops. They also helped grow cash for export.</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>He said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the knowledge</i>


<i>their children had brought home.</i>


5. <i>He told his grandchildren: Study harder so that you can do</i>“
<i>more for the village than your parents did</i>”


Individual
work


pair work


7’


after you read


Ask Ss to work in groups and discuss the question:


<i>How can people with an education help make the life of their </i>
<i>community better?</i>


Clarity some terms like:


<i>People with an education refers to people with a university study.</i>
Tell Ss to look back to the passage to get the ideas for the questions.
Go to groups and provide help when necessary.


Give suggested answers:


<i>Introduce new farming methods</i>
<i>Grow cach crops for export</i>



<i>Help local people apply modern technology in farming</i>
<i>Help community especially young people acsess to ways of </i>
<i>entertainment</i>


<i>Raise people s awareness about food safety and environmental hygiene</i>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

3’ <b>wrapping</b>


Sumarise the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : December 1 6th 2007 period 48


unit 8 - lesson2 - speaking


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about plants to improve life of a village and their
possible results.


II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


December 2007


IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’


warm – up


<b>Brainstorming</b>



Tell Ss close the book


Ask Ss to work in small groups and make a list of the ideas that can be
carrued out to improve the village life.


Encourage Ss to have ideas of their own. Ss may share ideas in
Vietnamese ans ask T later for English equivalences.


Gather ideas and lead in Presentation.


Group work


10’


<b>Presentation</b>


Ask Ss to pen the book and look at the situation in Task 1:


<i>The village of Ha Xuyen are discussing plants to improve life in the </i>
<i>village. Match the plants with possible results.</i>


Explain some possible new words:
resurface (v):<i>put new surface on, renew</i>
canal (n): <i>man-made waterway for irrigation</i>
muddy (a):<i>full of mud</i>


Have Ss do the task in pairs. Tell Ss to give explaination for their
answers.


Call on some Ss to read the answers aloud in front of the class.


Check the answers in front of the class as a whole.


<i>1. b 2. g 3. d </i>
<i>4. e 5. f 6. c</i>


Pair work


10’ <b>practice</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups of three: Read and practice the conversations.
Call on some groups to practice the conversation in front of the class.
Briefty explain <i>Conditionnal sentence type 1:</i>


If S + do (present tense), S + will/can/may/might + do.
If clause main clause


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

E.g:


<i>If the roads <b>are widened</b>, cars and lories <b>can get</b> to out village.</i>
If the time allowed, ask Ss to make more sentences with condtionnal
sentence type 1.


15’


<b>further practice</b>
<b>Controlled discussion</b>


Keep Ss in groups and continue the conversation, using the ideas in the
rable in Task 1.



Go around the class and provide help when necessary.
Note: Ss may add their own ideas in the conversation.


Call on some groups to act out the conversation in front of the class.
Comment and have necessary corrections.


Give suggested answers:


<i>A: I think we should build a football ground, too.</i>


<i>B: I completely agree with you. If a football ground is built, young </i>
<i>people can play sports to improve their health.</i>


<i>C: A football ground is also a place where people can meet and </i>
<i>exchange ideas.</i>


<i>A: What about a medical centre.</i>


<i>B: That s a good ideas. If a medical centre is built, people s health will </i>’ ’
<i>be looked after better.</i>


<i>C: Yes, And if we get sick, we won t have to go to district and </i>’
<i>provincial hospital for treatment.</i>


Group work


3’ <b>wrapping</b>


Sumarise the main points.



Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : December 17th 2007 period 49

unit 8- lesson 3 - listening


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:


- compare the past and the present of a town.


- Improve listening skill through True or False and Gap-filling excercises.
II. Materials:



Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

10 A1


10 A 5 December 2007
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


10’ warm - up


Find someone who



<b>Did you use to….?</b> <b>Name</b>


<i>have a favorite toy when you were a child?</i>
<i>have a nickname?</i>


<i>have a pet?</i>


<i>cry at night when you were a child?</i>
<i>hate school?</i>


<i>play hide-and-seek</i>
.





Group work


7’ <b>before you listen</b>


Ask Ss to work in pairs: Look at the pictures of the same town in the
book and discuss the differences between them. Follow the example.
Tell Ss to study the pictures careeefully and find as many differences as
possible.


Call on some Ss to share their findings in front of the class.
Give suggested answers:


<i>In the past, there used to be no cars in the town, but now there is a big </i>
<i>car park with a lot of cars inside.</i>


<i>In the past, the roads used to be small, but now they are bigger and </i>
<i>wider.</i>


<i>In the past, the buffalos used to walk on the roads, but now there aren t</i>’
<i>any buffalos on the roads.</i>


<i>In the past, the roads used to be dirty, but now they are very clean.</i>


Pair work


10’


10’



<b>While you listen</b>
<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>You will hear someone talking about the changes in his hometown. </i>
<i>Listen to the talk and do the task that follow.</i>


<b>Task 1 </b>–<b> True or False</b>


Ask Ss to listen to the tape and decide if the statements are true or false
according to the talk.


Play the tape several times if necessary.


Have Ss compare their answers with a friend and correct the false ones.
Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.


Feedback and give correct answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>F. (It s on the south coast of England)</i>’
<i>2.</i> <i>F. (It used to be a small quiet town)</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>T</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>F. (A lot of trees have been cut down for wider streets)</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>F. (Some people don t like the changes, they miss the quiet and</i>’
<i>peacefull life of the old town)</i>


<b>Task 2 </b>–<b> Gap-filling</b>


Tell Ss to read a part of the talk carefully and have a guess of the


missing words.


Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and fill the gaps with the words they
hear.


Play the tape more than onece if necessary.


Ask Ss to write the exact and gramatically correct words.
Call on some Ss to explain their answers in front of the class.
Make necessary corrections:


Feedback and give correct answers:


<i> 1. houses 2. hotel</i>
<i> 3. widened 4. cut</i>
<i> 5. car 6. shop</i>
<i> 7. department 8. expensive</i>


<b>Tapescript</b>


<i>Popffero used to be a small quiet town on the south coast of England. </i>
<i>But it has become a crowded and busy tourist resort now. They ve </i>’
<i>completely destyoued its old atmosphere. The small old houses have </i>
<i>been pulled down, and tall bulding have been put there instead. </i>
<i>They ve also built a big hotel in the middle of the town. The narrow </i>’
<i>streets have been widened and resurfaced, so the big trees on the two </i>
<i>sides of the streets have been cut down. The large area of grass land in </i>
<i>the suburbs of the town has been turned into an ugly car park. Even the</i>


Individual


work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<i>old corner shop isn t there anymore. It has been repalced by a big </i>’
<i>department store. And there is an expensive restaurant where there </i>
<i>used to be an old tea shop. Many people in Popffero are happy with the</i>
<i>changes as there are nore jobs for them. But some people don t like the</i>’
<i>changes: they miss the quiet and peacefull life of the old town.</i>


5’ <b>After you listen</b> Pair work


3’ <b>wrapping</b>


Sumarise the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...



...
...


Date of preparing : December 26th 2007 period 51

unit 8 - lesson 4 - writing


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to
II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1
10 A 5


December 2007


IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’ <b>warm </b>–<b> up</b>


<b>Follow directions</b>



Call on some Ss to go to the board and follow T’s directions. Ss who do
not follow the directions correctly will be loser.


Note: This activity can be interesting when Ss are required to follow
directions like turn right, turn left, go ahead, go past the door…


Whole class


10’ <b>Presentation</b>


<b>Set the scene</b>


<i>Jim has decided to come to Ann s place for his holiday. Ann writes him </i>’
<i>a letter giving direction to her house. Now let s work in pairs, read the </i>’
<i>letter and study the map carefully to find Ann s house on the map.</i>’
Have Ss work in pairs and do the task.


<i>Note:</i> Ss may draw the dirrections on the map while discussing.


Hang the map on the board and ask Ss to draw the directions on the big
map.


Pair work


15’ <b>practice</b>


Explain the task:


<i>Your house is A on the map.Write a letter to Jim, telling him the way to </i>
<i>your house from Roston Railway Station.</i>



Ask Ss to write the letter independently and go around the class,
provide help when necessary.


Have Ss compare their writing with a friend.
Introduce peer correction.


Pick up some writing and correct in front of the class.
Feedback anf give suggested answers:


<i>Dear Jim,</i>


<i>I m very happy to hear that you will come here for the summer holiday.</i>’
<i>I m writing to tell you how to get to my house from the Roston Railway</i>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

<i>Station.</i>


<i>Now when you come out of the station, turn right.Keep walking for</i>
<i>about 5 minutes, you will see a small bridge ahead. Go over the bridge,</i>
<i>go along the street past the medical centre and car park then take the</i>
<i>second turning on the left. Walk past the Souvernir shop and you will</i>
<i>see my house. It s on the right, next to the shop. You can t miss it.I</i>’ ’
<i>enclose the map so that you can follow my directions easily.</i>


<i>Lookng forward to seeing you soon.</i>
<i>Love,</i>


10’ <b>further practice</b>


Give out the prepared map of a city/ a university…


(See Supplements for the sample map)


Have Ss ask and answer the directions to some certain places on the
map.


Go around the class and provide help when necessary.
Make necessary corrections.


Group work


3’ <b>wrapping</b>


Sumarise the main points.


Assign homework. Whole class


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...
...



...
...


Date of preparing : December 28th 2007 period 52

unit 8 - lesson 5 - language focus


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to
II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

10 A1


10 A 5 January 2008
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work arrangement


5’


warm – up


<b>Sentence transformation</b>


Ask Ss to work in groups of 4.
Students 1 says sentence 1.


Students 2 report sentence 1 and says sentence 2.


Students 3 report sentence 2 and says sentence 3.
Students 4 report sentence 3 and says sentence 4.
Students 1 report sentence 4.


E.g.


Student 1: “I study at Kim Lien high school.”


Student 2: “She said she studied at Kim Lien high school. “I like
English most”


Student 3: “He said he liked English most. “I have five classed a
week”.


Student 4: “She saidshe had five classes a week, “I don’t go to school
by bus”


Student 1: He said he didn’t do to school by bus”




Group work


5’ pronunciation
presentation 1


Demonstrate the sounsd /au/ and /ǝ u/ by pronuncing them clearly
and slowly.


Help Ss to disguish these two sounds.


Instruct the way to pronounce:


/au/ has two sounds /a/ and then add u. This is very short.aaau
/ǝu / has two sound / ǝ / and /u/


First pronounce the sound / ǝ /. And now make it longer:ǝǝǝu


Whole class


5’ <b>Practice 1</b>


Play the tape and ask them to repeat.


Call on some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly to class.
Ask Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences.
Introduce peer correction.


Go around and provide help ifnecessary.


Pair work


7’ <b>Grammar and vocabulary</b>


<b>presentation 2</b>
<b>Reported speech Statement</b>


Present the notes/rules in reported statements:


1. If the reporting verb is in the past tense. (e.g,said, told), it is usual
for the verb in the reported clause to move “one tense back”.



Present---> past


Present perfect---> past perfect
Past---> past perfect


“<i>I m going ---> he said he was going.</i>’ ”


2.If the reporting verb is in the present tense (e.g, says, asks), there is
no tense change.


<i>The train will be late---> He says the train will be late.</i>


3.The one tense back rule also applies to reported throughts and
feelings.


<i>I thought she was married, but she isn t.</i>’


4.Typical pronoun, time, place and modal verb changes


1.1Pronoun changes



<b>Direct speech</b> <b>Reported speech</b>


I he/she


we they


mine his/hers



me/you him/her


us them


ours theirs


my His/ her


our their


myself himself/herself


4.2.Time and place changes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

<b>Direct speech</b> <b>Reported speech</b>


Time <i>now</i> <i>then</i>


<i>two days ago</i> <i>two days before</i>


<i>Today</i> <i>that day</i>


<i>Tonight</i> <i>that night</i>


<i>Tomorrow</i> <i>the next/following day</i>
<i>Yesterday</i> <i>The day before</i>


<i>Last night</i> <i>The night before</i>


Place <i>Here</i> <i>There</i>



<i>This place</i> <i>that place</i>
<i>These places</i> <i>those place</i>
1.2 Modal verb changes


<b>Direct speech</b> <b>Reported speech</b>


<i>can</i> <i>could</i>


<i>will</i> <i>would</i>


<i>may</i> <i>might</i>


<i>Note:</i>

Other modal verb don’t change



<b>Direct speech</b> <b>Reported speech</b>


<i>should</i> <i>should</i>


<i>might</i> <i>might</i>


<i>must</i> <i>must (Must can change to <b>had </b></i>
<i><b>to</b>)</i>


5.In formal situation, we can use that after the reporting verb.
<i>He told me (that) he would be home late.</i>


6. There are more than one reporting verb. We can use may other
reporting verbs beside <i>say</i> and <i>tell.</i> For example, <i>think, announce, </i>
<i>explain, interupt,demand, insist, admit, complain, warn.</i>



<i> </i>


5’ <b>practice 2</b>


Ask Ss to do exercises 1: Report the statements using the verbs
suggested.


Have them to compare the answers with a friend.
Check the answers in front of the class as a whole.
Give correct answers:


<i>1.</i> <i>An old man said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the </i>
<i>knowledge their children brought home.</i>


<i>2.</i> <i>She said she was going to HCM City soon.</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>I thought the film would be interesting.</i>


<i>4.</i> <i>She said she couldn t help me/you/himher’</i> <i>… because she </i>
<i>had too much to do.</i>


<i>5.</i> <i>Rick told me that Anne had written Jim a letter.</i>


<i>6.</i> <i>He told me it took him three hours to get there because the </i>
<i>roads were muddy and slippery.</i>


<i>7.</i> <i>She said she thought it was a crazy idea and it wouldn t ’</i>
<i>work.</i>


<i>8.</i> <i>He announced that breakfast was served between 7:00 and</i>


<i>9:00</i>


6’ <b>presentation 3</b>


Make clear the difference between say, tell and talk:
<i>Say (without object) + clause</i>


<i>Tell (with object) + clause</i>
<i>Talk (to smb) about smt</i>


Demotrate the use by giving examples.


Make sure Ss understand the use of these verbs.


Whole class


6’ <b>Practice 3</b>


Ask Ss to do exercise 2: Complete the sentences with <b>say, tell</b> or <b>talk.</b>


Call on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class.
Feedback and give correct answers:


<i>1. told</i>
<i>2. said</i>
<i>3. said</i>
<i>4. told</i>
<i>5. talked</i>


Individual


work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

...
...
...
...
...


...
...


...


...



Date of preparing: December 30th 2007 Period 53


Test yourself c


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: mass media, the story of my village.
- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book….


<b>III. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>



<b>arrangement</b>


13
minutes


Listening


- Sts read throught the listening part then listen to the tape about the test.
- Sts choose T/F .


- T plays the tape again then checks the answers with the class.
- Give final feedback.


KEY:


<i>a, 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. f 5. T</i>
<i>b, 1. aren't 2. evening 3. cinemas 4. theatres</i>
<i> 5. knows</i>


Individual work


13
minutes


Reading


- Sts read the passage then answer the questions follow.
- Sts check the answers with the partners



- T checks and give corrections in front of the class.
KEY:


<i>1. Tv is covernient and rather cheap source fof entertainment.. </i>
<i> 2. P can see plays, film of every kinds and...</i>


<i>3. because he needs to do nothing and he even doesn't use his legs.</i>


<i> 4. If we get to like watching TV too much it will dominate our life... </i>
<i> 5. That TV is good or bad depend on people.</i>


Individual work
and pair work


13
minutes


Pronunciation and grammar


-. Sts complete the sentences , using the right forms of the infinitive.
- T goes aroud to check their answers.


- T asks Sts to share their answers with the partners.
- T gives the final answers key.


KEY: 1. have been- haven't had 2. haven't given- have paid
3. said 4. had taken


5. thought- would come 6. told- have got



Individual work
and pair work


6 minutes


Writing.


- Sts do the part at home.


- T gives them the form of a writing about the party.


- Sts use the questions in their books to make the plan of the writing.
_ Sts may ask the teacher more information or structures before writing.
<i>.</i>


Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

_...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...
...


Date of preparing: December 14th<sub> 2007</sub> <sub>Period 54</sub>



Checking the second test

<b>(45 minutes)</b>
<b>I. Aim of the test checking:</b>


- Find and Correct Sts’ mistakes


- Retell them about the uses of the structures that they were not correct.


<b>II. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


11A5 ...January 2008 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>III. Procedure: (123)</b>


Time Steps Work


arrangement



7 minutes


Listening


- T reads or plaus the tape again and stops at the keyswords.
- T writes the mising words on the board or asks sts to write on the


board if they can.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

7 minutes


Pronunciation


- Call on sts to go to the board to read and wite the pronunciation of the
word to find out the word prunounce different from the others.


- T gives feedback Individual work


10 minutes


Grammar


Ask sts to review the grammar carefully.
T checks all the sentences slowly


Whole class


10 minutes


Reading



- T asks sts to read the passage once more time to answer the questions.
- T checks in front of the class.


- Sts translate the passaga into Vietnamese to understand the content of
the passage.


Whole class


9 minutes


Writing


T asks Sts rechoose the sentences then explain them.
T check in front of the class.


KEY: Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...
...
...


_...
...
...
...


...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

unit 9



lesson 1 - reading


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to
II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1


10 A 5 January 2008
IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’ warm – up


<b>Competition game</b>


-T sticks the map of the world on the board (the map is in English).
- T asks Ss to work in groups of 5 and gives each group a set of 5



flash with the names of the 5 oceans in Vietnamese.


- T asks Ss to read the names of the oceans on the map and match
the Vietnamese names with the appropriate English names. The
quickest group will go to the board and stick the Vietnamese
names on the appropriate places on the map next to the E names
- The winner is the group who find the correct answers in the


shortest period of time.


<i><b>1.</b></i> <i>Arctic Ocean: Băc Băng Dơng</i>


<i><b>2.</b></i> <i>Antartic Ocean: Nam Băng Dơng</i>


<i><b>3.</b></i> <i>Pacific Ocean: Thái Bình Dơng</i>


<i><b>4.</b></i> <i>Atlantic Ocean: Đại Tây Dơng</i>


<i><b>5.</b></i> <i>Indian Ocean: ấn Độ Dơng</i>


Group work


10 Before you read


<b>Finding names of Animals</b>


- T asks Sts to give the Vietnamese names of the animals in the
pictures. Then ask Sts for the E names of the pictures. If Sts do
not know them in E, T should provide them.



<i>1. seal</i>
<i>2. jellifish</i>
<i>3. turtle</i>
<i>4. shark</i>


<b>Vocabulary</b>


<i>mystery(n) bí ẩn</i>
<i>beneath(prep): dới</i>
<i>submarine: (n) tàu ngầm</i>
<i>fall into: (v) đợc chia thành</i>
<i>water current: (n) dòng nớc</i>
<i>organism: (n) sinh vt</i>


<i>At stake: at risk: (v) bị đe doạ</i>


<i>-</i>T may ask some Ss to make sentences with the above words to check
their understanding.


Whole class


7’ <b>while you read</b>


<b>Setting the scene</b>


You are going to read a passage on the life in the sea.While you are
reading, do the tasks in the textbook.


Task 1: Gap filling based on word meaning guessing



Instruction: Fill each blank with one of the words in the box. All of the
words appear in the reading passage.


- T writes these words on the board:


Gulf, investigate, oversized, tiny, biodiversity, samples, challenge,
provide.


- Then T instructs Ss to read the passage quickly and stop ai lines
that contain these words to guess their meanings.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

(more,higher)+sized.


- T checks that Ss undrestand the words correctly, T can check
Ss’s understanding by asking them to provide the Vietnamese
equivalents to the words.


- Next, T instructs Ss to use some strategies to do task 1:


+First, Ss should read through the sentences provided in the task to
identify the part of speech of the word to fill in each blank. For
example, in sentence 1 the word to fill in should be an ajective, in
sentenccce 2 a verb, in setence 3 a noun…..


+Read the fisrt sentence carefully to understand the meaning
roughtly. Read the words/phrases in the box to choose the most
suitable one to fill in the blank.


+ Continue with the rest of sentences.



- T asks Ss to work individual to do the task.
- T goes around to help Ss when necessary.
- T asks to exchange their answers with other Ss.


- T asks Ss for their answers and tells them to explain their
choices.


- T gives the correct answers:


self - evaluation :


...
...
...
...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : January 6th 2008 Period 56


Unit 9- Lesson 2- speaking


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b> - Talk about how to protect the invironment



<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Picture, text book, handout….


<b> III. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….January 2008 ……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work</b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7 minute


Warm- up



We can call birbs, animals, forests, rivers, seas in one word. What word is it in
English?


Key: Nature


Question: What do you think about our nature now? Is it in good condition?
(No, it is worse than it was many years ago.)


Intro: All animals, forests, rivers, seas around us are called “nature”. Nature is


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

necessary for our life, but it is now in bad condition . Today we’ll learn about
nature and some ways to protect it.


5 minutes


Pre- Speaking


<b>1. Task 1( 97) Put the number of importance</b>


- T asks Sts to work in pair to practice


- T walks around to explain new words if necessary.


- T calls on some pairs to give their answers and asks other pairs if they agree
or disagree with their friends' answers


KEY:


Forms: we should(not)...



We should place rubbish and plastic bads in proper dustbins.
We should use water sparingly and shouldn't polluted it.
We should dispose of fishing lines and nets properly


We should not use herbicides.... that harm the environment.


pair work


10 minutes


While speaking


<b>Task 2 ( 97)</b>


- T introduces the task then ask them to do the task .
<i>(Using the suggestion at page 97)</i>


<i> </i>


- Sts use the <b>Useful language</b> on the books to discus.
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls on some pairs to read out his/ her answers
- T checks with the class and gives corrective feedback.


Group work
and pair work


10 minutes



Post speaking


<b>Task 3 (97)</b>


- Sts read the <b>suggestions</b> in task 3 (97)
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls some Sts to talk about their answers in front of the class.


- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments. Group work and Whole
class


3 minutes Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


Write these other dialogues using the forms in task1 and task 2.


Whole class




Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...



Date of preparing : January 8th 2008 Period 57


Unit 9- Lesson 3- listening


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:
- Develop extensive listening skills.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, handout….


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


January


……… 2008.……….


...


………


………


………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm- up


- Ask Sts some questions about the sea
EG: <i>1. Have you ever seen a whale?</i>
<i>2. Can you tell me about it?</i>


<i>3. How big is a whale?</i>


<i>4. What are the advantages and disadvantages of protect whales ?</i>
<i>...</i>


Whole class


10
minutes


Pre- listening



<b>1: New word:</b>


<i>mammal(n)</i>
<i>conservation(n)</i>
<i>blue whale(n0</i>
<i>to give birth(v)</i>


- T helps Sts to pronounce the words in the book correctly.


- T plays tape or read aloud the words then asks Sts to repeat after in chorus and
individually.


- Some Sts read the words in front of the class.
- T corrects errors if any.


- T checks that Sts know the meaning of the words.


Whole class


10
minutes


While- listening




<b>Task 1(98)</b>


<b>Choose the best answers:</b>



- Sts read through the sentences in task 1 to understand them and
underline the key words. Predict the answers before listening


- Play the tape 2 times
- Check sts’ understanding


- Play the tape again and stop at the sentence keys for sts to remember the
answers and tick.


- Sts compare the answers with the partners.
- Give them correction.


KEY:


1<i>. F 2. T 3.T 4. F 5.T </i>


Individual work
and pairwork


<b>Task 2 ( 98)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

8 minutes -- Sts try to hear the main information.Sts ask and the others answer the questions.


- Check sts’ understanding by calling on some Sts to ask and answers in
front of the class.


- Play the tape again to help them if necessary.
- Give feedback.


KEY:



1. The blue whale grow to 30m in lengh and over 200 tons in weight.
2. Because there is alot of krill..


3. Cold waters in the North and South Atlantic and the North and South
Pacific


4. Heavy hunting is the main reason for the decsease in whale population
...


Pair work


8 minutes Post- listening


T asks Sts to discus to find out the information about blue whale using the
cues:


Key:


1. The blue whale grow to 30m in lengh and over 200 tons in weight. It is
vevy big.


2. Cold waters in the North and South Atlantic and the North and South
Pacific is comfortable to live in.


3. these wonderful animal will disappear if we don't protect them.


Group work


2 minutes



Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson


- Write a paragraph about the text. Whole class


Self- evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

Date of preparing : January 16th 2008 Period 58


Unit 9- Lesson 4- writing


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


. - Write a discription about whale and dophin.


<b> </b>


<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, textbook, ...


<b> </b>


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5 ……….January 2008 ……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm up


Check the old lesson. Group work


10
minutes


Pre- writing


<b>Tast 1: (99)</b>



-Ask sts to look at the passage carefully then read through the discription
- Sts work in group of a table.


- Call on 3 presentatives of 3 group to write the answers on the board.
- Check with the whole class.


KEY:



sperm whale


<i>range and habitat</i> <i>all oceans</i>


<i>size</i> <i>frefer water with high squid population</i>
<i>feeing habit</i> <i>- Male: 18m and 54 tons</i>


<i>- Female: 12m, 17 tons</i>
<i>offspring</i> <i>carnivores</i>


<i>-eat up to 15ookg a day</i>


<i>life span</i> <i>- give birth to onr calf every 5 to 7 years</i>
<i>- gestation period: 14- 19 months</i>
<i>- up to 60 to70 years</i>


<i>special features</i> <i>biggest animal that have teeth on Earth.</i>
<i>- Have the largest brain of all mammals</i>


<i>conservation concerns</i> <i>All risk due to hunting and accidental fishing net </i>
<i>entrapment</i>



Individual work
and whole class
and pair work


14
minutes


While- writing


<b>Task 2 </b>


- Complete the writing about dophin using tast 1 and the give table.
<i> KEY. </i>


Individual
work, pair work
and whole class


Post- writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

10


minutes - T writes Sts’ mistakes on the board and elicits self and peer correction.- T elicits comments from the class and give correct answers. whole class


2 minutes


Wrapping up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.



- For homework: T asks Sts to write the descrition of the chart about the


number of people using mobile network whole class


Self- evaluation:


_<i>KEY:</i>...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...
...
...
...


...
...


_ ...
...


Date of preparing : January 16th 2008 Period 59


Unit 9- Lesson 5- language focus


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>


- Distinguish the clusters / i /, / e /, / u /, and pronounce the words and dialogue containing them
correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- Conditional sentences type 2
-Should


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book, cassette, CDs ….
<b>III. Organization:</b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….January 2008……….


...


………


………
………


………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

7 minutes


Pronunciation:


- <b>1. Distinguish these sound: </b>/ i /, / e /, / u //,
- T models 3 sounds / i /, / e /, / u /, three times
- T explains how to produce them


- T plays the tape once for sts to hear the words containing these sounds, plays
again and ask sts to read follow the tape.


- Ask sts to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more
times


- call someone to read out loud


- Listen then correct if sts read the target words incorrectly.


2. <b>Practising sentences containing target sounds:</b>


- Ask then to take turn to read aloud the given sentences
- - T goes around to listen an dtakes notes of the typical errors.


- T calls on some Sts to read again and provides corrective feedback.


Whole class


Pair work and
group work


10
minutes


Grammar:


<b>1 Presentation1:</b>


T reintroduces about Conditional sentences type 2


Then ask them to do the tasks follow.



Type Form Use + Example


1 If + S + simple present, S +
will + Vn


In these sentences, the time is the
present or future and the situation is
real. They refer to a possible


condition and its probable result
Eg: If you are sad, I'll make you
happy.



She will visit her grandparent at
weekend if she has time.


2 If + S + past simple, S +
would/ could + Vn


Like type 1, type 2 refers to the
present or future, and the past tense
in the if- clause is not a true past but
a subjunctive, which indicates
unreality and improbability.


Eg; If I were a beautiful girl like Ha
Kieu Anh, I would be famous.
He would fly to school if he were a
bird.


Individual work
and whole class


12
minutes


2. Practice


<b>Task 3(103 )</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 1 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.



- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.


<b>KEY: 1. </b>didn't go 2. would feel
3. would take 4. refused


5. wouldn't get 6. closed down


<b>Task 1( 102)</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 2 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.
Key:


<i>1. you should go away for a few days</i>
<i>2. You should look for the other job</i>
<i>...</i>


Pair work &
whole class


Pair work &
whole class


<b>Task 2 ( 102) </b>


- T divides the class into 4groups.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

10
minutes


KEY:


<i>1.I don't think they should get married .</i>
<i>2. I think smoking should be banned</i>


<i>3. ..I don't think you should go out this evening</i>
<i>4. I think the boss should resign</i>


Group work


3 minutes


wrapping- up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


For homework: T asks Sts to revise conditional sentences and make more
axamples


<b>) </b>


Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...


...


_ ...
...


_...
...
...
...


Date of preparing : January 15th 2008 period 60

unit 10. conservation



unit 10- lesson 1 - reading


<b>I. Objectives </b>:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


<b>- </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, guessing meaning in context.
- Use the information they have read to discuss the topic.


II. Materials:


Textbook, writeboard markers, ....
III. Organiration:


class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10 A1



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

IV. procedure :


Time Steps work


arrangement


7’ warm – up


<b>Matching picture with the names of the animals:</b>


<b>picture</b> <b>names of the animals</b>


tiger



cleopard



bears



dogs



Group work


10’ Before you read


<b>1. Look at the picture and answer the questions</b>


- T asks Sts to give the Vietnamese names of the animals in the
pictures. Then ask Sts for the E names of the pictures. If Sts do
not know them in E, T should provide them



- T asks sts some othe questions:
a, What is in the p1? Do you like it?
b. What is in the p2?


<b>-</b>Sts answer the T's questions and all the questions on page 104


<b>2. Vocabulary</b>


<i>Variety:(n)sự đa dạng</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<i>dam(n) đập</i>


<i>circulation(n) vịng tuần hồn</i>
<i>conserve(v) bảo tồn</i>


<i>conservation(n) sự bảo tồn</i>
<i>Rapid(adj) xiết</i>


<i>damage(v)phá huỷ</i>
<i>threatened(adj) bị đe doạ</i>


<i>-</i>T may ask some Ss to make sentences with the above words to check
their understanding.


7’ <b>while you read</b>


<b>Setting the scene</b>


You are going to read a passage on the life in the sea.While you are
reading, do the tasks in the textbook.



<b>Task 1: Matching</b>


Instruction: Fill each blank with one of the words in the box. All of the
words appear in the reading passage.


- T writes these words on the board:


Gulf, investigate, oversized, tiny, biodiversity, samples, challenge,
provide.


- Then T instructs Ss to read the passage quickly and stop ai lines
that contain these words to guess their meanings.


- Ss guess the meanings of the words based on the contexts in the
sentences and the components of the words. For example, to
guess the meaning of oversized Ss can use the relation between
small , oversized and however…or (dï…hay..),T can also help Ss
analyze the formation of the words:oversized=over (more,higher)
+sized.


- T checks that Ss undrestand the words correctly, T can check Ss’s
understanding by asking them to provide the Vietnamese


equivalents to the words.


- Next, T instructs Ss to use some strategies to do task 1:


+First, Ss should read through the sentences provided in the task to
identify the part of speech of the word to fill in each blank. For


example, in sentence 1 the word to fill in should be an ajective, in
sentenccce 2 a verb, in setence 3 a noun…..


+Read the fisrt sentence carefully to understand the meaning
roughtly. Read the words/phrases in the box to choose the most
suitable one to fill in the blank.


+ Continue with the rest of sentences.


- T asks Ss to work individual to do the task.
- T goes around to help Ss when necessary.
- T asks to exchange their answers with other Ss.


- T asks Ss for their answers and tells them to explain their
choices.


- T gives the correct answers:


Key: 1.c 2.a 3. d 4. b


<b>Tast 2: T/F statements</b>


- T asks Ss to work individual to do the task.
- T goes around to help Ss when necessary.
- T asks to exchange their answers with other Ss.


- T asks Ss for their answers and tells them to explain their
choices.


- T gives the correct answers:



KEY: 1. T 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. F 6.
F


Group work


12
minutes


Post- reading




<b>Task 3 (106) </b>


- T goes around to check and offer help.


- Sts share your pair’ s opinions with the others.
- T calls on some Sts to read their translations.
- T gives corrective feedback.


KEY:


A. 3 B. 4 C. 2


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

2
minutes


Homework



- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
T asks Sts to retell the text. Answer the ques at home


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...


Date of preparing : January 18th 2008 Period 61


Unit 10- Lesson 2- speaking


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b> - Talk about the advantages and disadvantage of zoos of the new kinds
<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Picture, text book, handout….


<b> III. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1 ………...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

10A5 ……….January 2008 ………. ………



………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work</b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7 minute


Warm- up


Check the old lesson Whole class


5 minutes


Pre- Speaking


<b>1. Vocabulary:</b>


<i>sensitive(a)nhạy cảm</i>
<i>imprison(v)tốg giam, nhốt</i>


<i>endangered(adj) dang có nguy cơ tuyệt chủng</i>
<i>recontruct(n) xây dựng lại</i>


<i>breed(v) nuôi</i>


<b> Task 1( 106) Answer the question:</b>



- T asks Sts to work in pair to practice


- T walks around to explain new words if necessary.


- T calls on some pairs to give their answers and asks other pairs if they agree
or disagree with their friends' answers


<i>KEY: </i>


<i>1. They are opened to help endanger species develop.</i>


<i>2. The animals are not kept in cages. They can live in the natural environment.</i>


pair work


10 minutes


While speaking


<b>Task 2 ( 107)</b>


- T introduces the task then ask them to do the task .
<i>(Using the suggestion at page 107)</i>


<i> </i>


- Sts use the <b>Useful language</b> on the books to discus.
- T goes around to check and offer help.



- T calls on some pairs to read out his/ her answers
- T checks with the class and gives corrective feedback.
The answer depends one each sts.


Group work
and pair work


10 minutes


Post speaking


<b>Task 3 (107): the advantages and disadvantage of zoos of the new kinds</b>


- Sts read the <b>suggestions</b> in task 3 (107)
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls some Sts to talk about their answers in front of the class.
- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.
<i>The answer depends one each sts</i>


Group work
and Whole
class


3 minutes Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
Write their discusion .


Whole class





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

………
………...
...
...
...
...
...


Date of preparing : January 19th 2008 Period 62


Unit 10- Lesson 3- listening


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:
- Develop extensive listening skills.


- Use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, handout….


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5


January


……… 2008.……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm- up


- Ask Sts some questions :


EG: <i>1. Have you ever gone camping?</i>
<i>2. Can you tell me about it?</i>



<i>3. When did you go?</i>
<i>4. Who do you do with ?</i>
<i>5. How about your feeling?</i>


Whole class


10
minutes


Pre- listening


<b>1: New word:</b>


<i>forest(n)rừng</i>
<i>forester(n) kiểm lâm</i>
<i>camp-fire(n) lửa trại</i>
<i>campfire(v)đốt lửa trại</i>
<i>careless(a) thiếu cẩn thận</i>


- T helps Sts to pronounce the words in the book correctly.


- T plays tape or read aloud the words then asks Sts to repeat after in chorus and
individually.


- Some Sts read the words in front of the class.
- T corrects errors if any.


- T checks that Sts know the meaning of the words.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

10
minutes


While- listening




<b>Task 1(108)</b>


<b>Number the order :</b>


- Sts read through the sentences in task 1 to understand them and
underline the key words. Predict the answers before listening


- Play the tape 2 times
- Check sts’ understanding


- Play the tape again and stop at the sentence keys for sts to remember the
answers and tick.


- Sts compare the answers with the partners.
- Give them correction.


KEY:


3 - 2 - 5 - 1 - 4


Individual work
and pairwork



8 minutes


<b>Task 2 ( 108)</b>


- Play the tape again


- Sts try to hear the main information.
- Sts ask and the choose T or F.


- Check sts’ understanding by calling on some Sts to ask and answers in
front of the class.


- Play the tape again to help them if necessary.
- Give feedback.


KEY:


1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F


Pair work


8 minutes Post- listening


T asks Sts to tick in the sentences thay they have heard
- Play the tape again


- Sts try to hear the main information.


- Check sts’ understanding by calling on some Sts to ask and answers in
front of the class.



- Play the tape again to help them if necessary.
- Give feedback.


Key:


1. a 2. b 3. a


Group work


2 minutes


Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson


- retell the text Whole class




Self- evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

...
...


Date of preparing : January 24th 2008 Period 63


Unit 10- Lesson 4- writing


<b>I. Objectives:</b>



. A letter of invitation


<b> </b>


<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, textbook, ...


<b> </b>


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….January 2008 ……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>



<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm up


T asks some questions


Have you ever invite anyone to do smt?


What will you give her/ him if he/ she invite them to the party?
...


Group work


10
minutes


Pre- writing


<b>Tast 1: (109)</b>


-Ask sts to look at table then match one in A with one in B to make an invitation
- Sts work in group of a table.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- Check with the whole class.


KEY:




<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


1 c


2 f/h


3 a


4 g/d


5 h/f


6 d/g


7 e


8 b


- Ask sts to read the invitation carefully the practice inviting.
Eg: Let's go to the cinema with me tonight.


=> Yes, I'd love to


-How about going to the cinema with me tonight?
=> Sorry, I can't. I have to do my homework.


and whole class
and pair work


17


minutes


While- writing


<b>Task 2 : Filling</b>


-Ask sts to look at table then use them to complete the invitations
- Sts work in group of a table.


- Call on 3 presentatives of 3 group to write the answers on the board.
- Check with the whole class.


<i> KEY. </i>


<i>1. Would you like</i>


<i>2. Would you like/ are you free</i>


<i>3. can you come/ why don't we/ shall we?</i>


<b>Task 3 : writing</b>


Asks sts to complete the letter in the partners
- T goes around th help and offers.


Individual
work, pair work
and whole class


7minutes



Post- writing


- T chooses one or two letters to read in front of the class.


- T writes Sts’ mistakes on the board and elicits self and peer correction.
- T elicits comments from the class and give correct answers.


Group work
and


whole class


2 minutes


Wrapping up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


- For homework: T asks Sts to write the descrition of the chart about the


number of people using mobile network whole class


Self- evaluation:


_<i>KEY:</i>...
...
...


_ ...


...


_...
...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

_ ...
...


Date of preparing : January 28th 2008 Period 64


Unit 10- Lesson 5- language focus


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>


- Distinguish the clusters / b /, / p /, and pronounce the words and dialogue containing them
correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


The passive voice


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book, cassette, CDs ….


<b>III. Organization:</b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


.February


……… 2008……….


...


………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

10A5 ………


………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7 minutes


Pronunciation:


- <b>1. Distinguish these sound: </b>/ b /, / p/
- T models 3 sounds / b /, / p /, three times


- T explains how to produce them


- T plays the tape once for sts to hear the words containing these sounds, plays
again and ask sts to read follow the tape.


- Ask sts to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more
times


- call someone to read out loud


- Listen then correct if sts read the target words incorrectly.


2. <b>Practising sentences containing target sounds:</b>


- Ask then to take turn to read aloud the given sentences
- - T goes around to listen an dtakes notes of the typical errors.
- T calls on some Sts to read again and provides corrective feedback.


Whole class


Pair work and
group work


10
minutes


Grammar:


<b>1 Presentation1:</b>



T reintroduces about passive voice


Then ask them to do the tasks follow.



Present simple
passive


S+ is/am/are + PP


EG: The windows are cleaned by me


Football is playing by the boys


E has been studied by us for 4 years
Present continuous


S+ is/am/are + being
+ PP


Present perfect
S+ have/ has+ been
+PP


...


Individual work
and whole class


12


minutes


2. Practice


<b>Task 1 (111 ) Put the right forms of the verbs</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 1 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.


<b>KEY: 1. </b>were reported 2. grow
3. be spoken 4. am not invited


5. are being built


<b>Task 2( 111)</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 2 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.
Key:


<i>1. came/ had started/ had been started/ were</i>
<i>2. is standing/ is being photographed</i>


<i>...</i>


Pair work &


whole class


Pair work &
whole class


10


<b>Task 3 ( 112) Filling</b>


- T divides the class into 4groups.


- Each group has done a sentence from 1 to 4.
- Corrects the sts' sentences with the whole class.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

minutes <i>1.was organized .</i> <i>had been cleaned</i> <i>9. made</i>
<i>3. were met</i> <i>put</i>


<i>4. ..taken</i> <i>was</i> <i>10. were served</i>
<i>2. arrived</i> <i>prepared</i>


3 minutes


wrapping- up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


For homework: T asks Sts to revise conditional sentences and make more
axamples


<b>) </b>



Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...


...


Date of preparing : January 28th 2008


Unit 11: National Park


<b>I. Objectives:</b>




<b>Reading:</b>


<b>- </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific
ideas, guessing meaning in context.


- Use the information they have read to discuss the topic.



<b>Skills </b> <b>Speaking:</b>


- Talk about the excursions .


<b>AIMS</b> <b>Listening: </b>


- Develop extensive listening skills.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

communicative tasks about Cuc Phuong National Park.


<b>Writing</b>


- Write letters of acceptance or refusal


<b>Language </b>


<b>focus</b> <b>1. Pronunciation:</b>- Distinguish the clusters / t /, / d /, /kw / and pronounce the
words and dialogue containing them correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- Use conditional sentences (types 3 )


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, text book ...


<b>III. Devision of the unit:</b>


<b>-</b> Period 65: reading


<b>-</b> Period 66: speaking


<b>-</b> Period 67: listening


<b>-</b> Period 68: writing


<b>-</b> Period 69: language focus


Date of preparing: February 8th 2008 Period 65


Unit 11- Lesson 1- Reading


<b> I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>- </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, guessing meaning in
context.


- Use the information they have read to discuss the topic.


<b> II. Materials:</b>
<b></b>


<b>--</b> Textbook , handout , ….


<b>III. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils



10A1


10A5 ……….February 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>VI. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5


Warm- up


Cat Ba
- Sts close the books then discus :


Brainstorming: Cuc Phuong


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

minutes



Ba Be Cat Tien
Phong Nha- Ke Bang


Group work or
individual work


10
minutes


Pre- reading


<b>1.Look at the picture ( 112 )</b>


- T ask some questions about the pictures .


<b>2. Vocabulary:</b>


<i>Esteblish(V)công nhận</i>
<i>hike(v)dạo chơi</i>
<i>orphan(v)mồ côi</i>
<i>abandone(v) từ bỏ</i>


<i>sub- tropical(a)cận nhiệt đới</i>
<i>wilderness(n)vùng hoang rã</i>
<i>contamination(n) sự ô nhiễm</i>


- Read after the teacher, tress,


- T calls some Sts to read the words aloud.



- T repeats the words if the Sts don’t read correctly.
- Using drup out and remember method to check.
- T gives feedback.


Individual work
Whole class


5
minutes


While- reading


<b>1. Task 1( 156 ): Filling</b>
<b> </b>


- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.
- T gets Sts to check their answers with a peer.


- T calls some sts to write their answers on the board,
the others read their answers,


then ask them to explain their choices.
- T gives corrective feedback.


KEY:


<i>1.Establish 2. contain 3. species </i>
<i>4. survival 5. sub- tropical 6. contamination</i>



Group work


5
minutes


<b>2. Task 2: (157 )</b>


- Sts read the text again if they cannot do the task without reading the
passage.


- First, Sts should skim the 3 questions to understand them.


- Sts underlined the key words to decide what information they need to find
in the text.


- Then they should go back to the passage and locate the key words in the
passage.


- Sts check the answers with their friends.


- T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers
- T gives feedback and correct answers.


KEY:
<i>1. 200 km</i>


<i>2. Because the rain season is over.</i>


<i>3. They can learn about the habits of animals and how one species dependent </i>
<i>upon anothr for servival.</i>



<i>4. In the orphanage, orphaned or abandoned are taken care of.</i>


<i>5. Everglades National Park is endanger because of the toxic level of chemicals </i>
<i>in the water.</i>


<i>6. If more chemicals are released into the water, plants and animals will die.</i>


Individual work
and whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

12
minutes




What antional Park you want to visit most? Why??
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- Sts share your pair’ s opinions with the others.
- T calls on some Sts to read their translations.
- T gives corrective feedback.


KEY:


.The answer depends on each people.


Group work


2


minutes


Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
T asks Sts to retell the text.


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...


Date of preparing: February 16th 2008 Period 66


Unit 11- Lesson 2- speaking


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b> - Express the excursion


<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Picture, text book, handout….


<b> III. Organiration</b>:



Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….February 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b> IV. Procedure:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b>arrangement</b>


10 minutes


Warm- up


T uses the pictures in reading period and asks sts:


1. Do you like to have an excursion with your classmates?
2. Where will you go?


3. What will you take with you?
4. Where will you sleep?



...


=>> Lead to the new lesson: talk about advantages and disadvantages.


Whole class


10 minutes


Pre- Speaking


<b>1. Task 1( 114) Matching</b>


- T asks Sts to work in pair to match the things with the suitable corresponding
consequentces.


- T walks around to explain new words if necessary.


- T calls on some pairs to give their answers and asks other pairs if they agree
or disagree with their friends' answers


- T asks them about the reasons why they agree or disagree.


Key:



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


f e h g b c a d


pair work



7 minutes


While speaking


<b>Task 2 ( 115)</b>


- T introduces the task then ask them to do the task .
<i>(Using the suggestion at page 115)</i>


<i> </i>


- Sts use the <b>Task 1+ the third coditional sentences </b>to talk
- T gets modal with a st in the class.


- Ask st to work in group of three.
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls on some pairs to read out his/ her answers
- T checks with the class and gives corrective feedback.
KEY:


1. If we had gone by bikes , we wouldn't have a car sick.


2. If we had brought enough food and drinks, we wouldn't have spent alot
money eating in the expensive restaurant.


3. If some of us hadn't had food poisoning, we would have eyjoyed the visit.
...



Whole class
and group
work


13 minutes


Post speaking


<b>Task 3 (115)</b>


Sts imagine that they were Nga to talk about their regrets about what they did
or what they didn't do.


<i>- Sts use the task 1.</i>


- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls some Sts to talk about their answers in front of the class.
- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.


Group work
and Whole
class


3 minutes Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
Write a passage about your excursion.


Whole class





</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

………
………...
...
...


Date of preparing: February 15th 2008 Period 67


Unit 11- Lesson 3- listening


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:
- Develop extensive listening skills.


- Use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks about Cuc Phuong
National


Park


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, handout….


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5


.February


……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm- up


- Check the sts' homework.


Whole class



10
minutes


Pre- listening


<b>1: Look at the book and answer the questions:</b>


1. Cuc Phuong National Park is located 160 kms south west of Hanoi.
2. 200 square km.


3. The best time to visit Cuc Phuong National Park is during the dry season.
4. Butterflies, cave, hike mountains and the 1000-year-old tree can be seen in
Cuc Phuong National Park


T gives correction.


<b>2: Listen and repeat:</b>


- T helps Sts to pronounce the words in the book correctly.


- T plays tape or read aloud the words then asks Sts to repeat after in chorus and
individually.


- Some Sts read the words in front of the class.
- T corrects errors if any.


- T checks that Sts know the meaning of the words.


Pair work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

10
minutes


While- listening




<b>Task 1(116)</b>
<b>Filling :</b>


- Sts read through the sentences in task 1 to understand them and
underline the key words. Predict the answers before listening


- Play the tape 2 times
- Check sts’ understanding


- Play the tape again and stop at the sentence keys for sts to remember the
answers and tick.


- Sts compare the answers with the partners.
- Give them correction.


KEY:


1<i>. 1960 2. </i>160 kms south west of <i> 3.100,000 visitors</i>
<i>4. 2,000- 450 5. Quen Voi </i>


Individual work
and pairwork



8 minutes


<b>Task 2 ( 116 )</b>


- Play the tape again


- Sts try to hear the main information.


- Sts ask and the others answer the questions.


- Check sts’ understanding by calling on some Sts to ask and answers in
front of the class.


- Play the tape again to help them if necessary.
- Give feedback.


KEY:


<i>1. It covers 3 provinves: Ninh Binh, Hoa Binh, and Thanh Hoa.</i>
<i>2. It is about 160 km.</i>


<i>3. They come here to see the work being done to protect endangered </i>
<i>species.</i>


<i>4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Quing invaders in the spring of 1789.</i>
<i>5. They live mainly on bee keeping and farming.</i>


Pair work


8 minutes Post- listening



-T plays the tape again then asks sts to repeat the sentences they have heard. Group work


2 minutes


Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson


- Write a paragraph about a camping holiday. Whole class


Self- evaluation:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

Date of preparing : January 28th 2008 Period 68


Unit 11:

Period 4: Writing



<b>I. Objectives</b>:


After the lesson, students will be able to write letters of acceptance and refusal.


<b>II. Teaching aids</b>: textbook, handouts, board.


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5



.February


……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………

III. Procedure.



<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


<b>6</b>’


Pre-

writing



- Prepares 3 similar sets of statements which are some common way of
inviting, accepting and refusing.


- Divides the class into 3 groups of 9 or 10.


- Gives each group a set of statements and asks them to put the statements
into the correct column.



- Calls on representative of each group go to board and write down their
answers. (Each group in charge of one column).


<i><b>Suggested answers</b></i>:
1. Inviting: A, B, H
2. Accepting: C, E, G, H.
3. Refusing: D, F, I


-Close their
textbooks
- Listen to T.
- Work group
- Give the
answers to T


<b>4</b>’


While –

writing



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<b>5</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: You are going to complete the letters on page 117 by filling
each blank with one of the ways to accept or refuse an invitation provided in


the table.


- Before Ss do the task, ask Ss to read through the expressions in the table to
understand them.


- Asks Ss to do the task in pairs and reminds them that for each blank they
can have more than one answer.


- Calls on some Ss to go and write their answer on the board.
- Calls for peer correction and gives T’s feedback.


<i><b>Suggested answers</b></i>:


1. That’s a great idea! / I’d like to/ I’d love to.


2. I’m afraid I can’t come because... / I’m sorry I can’t come because...
3. I’d be delighted to.


<i>b. Discuss the features of a letter of acceptance or refusal.</i>


-Analysis 3 letters in the text book to help Ss know how to write acceptance
or refusal letter:


+ Firstly, Ss should thank the addressees for his/ her invitation.


+ Use one of the ways of accepting or refusing to reply invitation letter. If Ss
refuse, they should remember to give reason for turning down the invitation;
and an alternative date or activity is often suggested.


<i>c. Activity 2: Ordering</i> (Task 2, page upload.123doc.net, textbook)



<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: You are required to arrange the sentences in the correct order to
make a letter of accepting an invitation to spend a weekend in the country.
- Asks Ss to do the task individually and exchange their answer with another
student when they have finished.


- Calls on a student to read the letter out loud and asks other Ss to listen and
give feedback.


- Comments and gives the correct order:
1d 2e 3c 4a 5f 6b
<i>d. Activity 3: Rearranging 2 letters. </i>(Handout)


- Ask Ss to work in pair and rearrange jumbled sentence to make two
complete letters.


- Calls on 2 students to write their answers on the board.
- Comments and gives the correct order:


Accepting: 1c, 2g, 3b, 4i, 5e/ 1c, 2g, 3b, 4e, 5i.
Refusing: 6j, 7a, 8h, 9d, 10f


<i>e. Activity 4: Writing a letter of acceptance or refusal.</i> (Task 3, page
upload.123doc.net, textbook).


<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: One of your friends has invited you to go for a picnic to Cuc
Phuonng National Park next weekend. Write a reply letter or declining his/
her invitation.


- Ask Ss to write the letter individually.



- Reminds them to pay attention to all the features of this type of letter.
- While Ss write the letter, T goes around to observe and provides help.
<i>f. Feedback on Ss writings.’</i>


- Ask Ss to exchange their letter with another student for peer correction.
- Goes around and collects mistakes and errors.


- Listen to T
- Pair work


-Whole class.


- Listen to T


- Individual and
pair work


- Pair work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<b>7</b>’


- Collects some writings for quick feedback.


- Write Ss’ typical errors on the board and elicits self and peer correction. T


provides correction only when Ss are not able to correct the errors. - Pair work and
whole class


<b>3</b>’



Post –

writing

:


- Summarizes themain point.


- Homework: asks Ss to write a letter of acceptance or refusal (if they have
written a letter of acceptance in class, at home they will write letter of
refusal and vice versa)


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



_...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...


...


...
...


Date of preparing : February 16th 2008 Period 69



Unit 11- Lesson 5- language focus


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>


- Distinguish the clusters / t /, / d /, and pronounce the words and dialogue containing them
correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- Conditional sentences type 3


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book, cassette, CDs ….
<b>III. Organization:</b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


.Febuary


……… 2008……….


...



………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

7 minutes


- <b>1. Distinguish these sound: </b>/ t /, / d/,
- T models 2 sounds / t /, / d /, three times
- T explains how to produce them


- T plays the tape once for sts to hear the words containing these sounds, plays
again and ask sts to read follow the tape.


- Ask sts to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more
times


- call someone to read out loud


- Listen then correct if sts read the target words incorrectly.



2. <b>Practising sentences containing target sounds:</b>


- Ask then to take turn to read aloud the given sentences
- - T goes around to listen an dtakes notes of the typical errors.
- T calls on some Sts to read again and provides corrective feedback.


Whole class


Pair work and
group work


10
minutes


Grammar:


<b>1 Presentation1:</b>


T reintroduces about Conditional sentences type 2


Then ask them to do the tasks follow.



Type Form Use + Example


1 If + S + simple present, S +
will + Vn


In these sentences, the time is the
present or future and the situation is


real. They refer to a possible


condition and its probable result
Eg: If you are sad, I'll make you
happy.


She will visit her grandparent at
weekend if she has time.


2 If + S + past simple, S +
would/ could + Vn


Like type 1, type 2 refers to the
present or future, and the past tense
in the if- clause is not a true past but
a subjunctive, which indicates
unreality and improbability.


Eg; If I were a beautiful girl like Ha
Kieu Anh, I would be famous.
He would fly to school if he were a
bird.


3 If + S + past perfect, S + would
have + PII


The time is past, and the condition
can't be fulfilled because the action
in the if- clause didn't happen.
Eg: If I had known her address last


Sunday, I would have invited her to
go camping.


Individual work
and whole class


12
minutes


2. Practice


<b>Task 1(119 )</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 1 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.


<b>KEY: 1. </b>had known 2. had had
3. would have gone 4. would have passed
5. could have enjoyed 6. had known


<b> </b>7. had stopped 8. had called


<b>Task 2( 119)</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 2 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.


Key:


<i>1. If the driver in front hadn't stopped suddently the accident wouldn't have </i>
<i>happened</i>


<i>2. If I had known that Lam has to get up early, I would have woken him up</i>
<i>...</i>


Pair work &
whole class


Pair work &
whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

10
minutes


- T divides the class into 5 groups.


- Each group has done a sentence from 1 to 5.
- Corrects the sts' sentences with the whole class.
KEY:


<i>1.If I had been working at the restaurant last night, I would have waited on </i>
<i>your table .</i>


<i>2. If he had paid attention, he would have seen the sign making their exit from </i>
<i>the highway</i>


<i>3. Carol would have answered the phone if she hadn't been studying</i>


<i>4. ...</i>


Group work


3 minutes


wrapping- up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


For homework: T asks Sts to revise conditional sentences and make more
axamples


Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...


_ ...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Date of preparing: February 21st 2008 Period 70


Test yourself d


<b>I. Objectives:</b>



- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: conservation, national park, music.
- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book….


<b>III. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


13
minutes


Listening


- Sts read throught the listening part then listen to the tape about the test.
- Sts answer the question in each sentence .


- T plays the tape again then checks the answers with the class.
- Give final feedback.


KEY:


1. People go to the park to enjoy nature
2. It became national park in 1972
3. No, it isn't



4. It has about 70geysers in the park


5. The visitors mustn't pick the flowers and feed or hunt the animals.


Individual work


13
minutes


Reading


- Sts read the passage then answer the questions follow.
- Sts check the answers with the partners


- T checks and give corrections in front of the class.
KEY:


1. a, junk or litter b. landscape
c, highway d, healthy
2. T/F


a b c d e f


T T F F T T


Individual work
and pair work


13
minutes



Pronunciation and grammar


. Sts complete the sentences , using the right forms of the infinitive.
- T goes aroud to check their answers.


- T asks Sts to share their answers with the partners.
- T gives the final answers key.


KEY:



A 1. has been cleaned


2. have been turned on
3. are waiting


B 1. knew


2. would help
3. knows


C 1. dicided


2. to stay


3. would have gone to
4. hadn't been


Individual work
and pair work



6 minutes


Writing.


- Sts do the part at home.


- T gives them the form of a writing about the party.


- Sts use the questions in their books to make the plan of the writing.
_ Sts may ask the teacher more information or structures before writing.


<i><b>Example:</b></i>


<i> Dear Alen, </i>


<i>You will be delighted to know Father is giving a party to celebrate the New </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<i>Year. He has invited some of our relatives and his friends to make the party a </i>
<i>success.</i>


<i>I too have invited a number of my friends in the neibourhood. Mother has has </i>
<i>asked me to tell you to come home for the New Year celebration.</i>


<i>I am sure you will be here in time to share the fun with us on that day.</i>
<i>Your siter,</i>


<i>Helen</i>


Self- evaluation:



_...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...
...


Date of preparing: February 21st 2008 Period 71


The third written test

(<b>45 minutes</b>)


<b>I. Aims of the test:</b>


- Check Sts’ understanding about the topic: conservation, national park, music.
- Sts can uses the tense forms and the structures to do the test.


- Checking the vocabularies, structures, and pronunciation.
.


………
<b>II. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5 …….. February 2008 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………


III.


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
_ ...
_...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

………
………
………
………
………
………
………



Date of preparing: February 24th<sub> 2008</sub> <sub>Period 72</sub>


Checking the third test

<b>(45 minutes)</b>


(Ma 123)


<b>I. Aim of the test checking:</b>


- Find and Correct Sts’ mistakes


- Retell them about the uses of the structures that they were not correct.


<b>II. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ...February 2008 ………


...


………


………
………
………
………
………


<b>III. Procedure: </b>


Time Steps Work


arrangement


7 minutes


Listening


- T reads or plaus the tape again and stops at the keyswords.
- T writes the mising words on the board or asks sts to write on the


board if they can.


- T comments the sts’ s papers.


<b>Keys: fill the missing information</b>


23. Spain 24. lunch 25. both A
and C


26. spelled
27. them 28. cows 29. pencil 30. tickets


Whole class


7 minutes


Pronunciation



- Call on sts to go to the board to read and wite the pronunciation of the
word to find out the word prunounce different from the others.


- T gives feedback


KEY:



19. deaf 20. vanuable


21. gestation 22. indanger


Individual work


10 minutes


Grammar


-Ask sts to choose the correct answer and ask them to write the form of
each sentence.


- T check with the whole class
KEY:


11. D 12. C 13. B 14. A 15. C


16. A 17. C 18. C


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

10 minutes



Reading


- T asks sts to read the passage once more time fill out the keys.


- T checks in front of the class.



1 2 3 4 5 6


T T T F F T


- Sts translate the passaga into Vietnamese to understand the content of
the passage.


Whole class


9 minutes


Writing


T chooses some papers then read in front of the class.
T check in front of the class.


KEY:
dear Mai,


Thank you for your invitation. You know how much I want to hear your
voice. There are 3 years since you has moved to Hanoi. Sometime, I see
you on Tv. You looks vwre beautiful. I will go there with some of our
friends. Ah, Are you free in the afternoon? If you can, please come to
have dinner with us. My mother will very happy to see you.



How are your parents? Please give my best regards to them.
Miss you!


Love,


Giang Huong


Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...
...
...


Date of preparing: March 1st 2008


Unit 12: Music


<b>I. Objectives:</b>




<b>Reading:</b>


- use vocabulary items related to music


- guess the meaning of words based on contexts


- scan for specific information about music<b>.</b>.


<b>Skills </b> <b>Speaking:</b>


- ask and answers questions about music
- talk about favorite kinds of music


<b>AIMS</b> <b>Listening: </b>


- Develop extensive listening skills.


- Use the information they have listened to for other
communicative tasks about Van Cao.


<b>Writing</b>


- Write a profile based on promts provided


<b>Language </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- T- V to espress purposes
- Wh-ques


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, text book ...



<b>III. Devision of the unit:</b>
<b>-</b> Period 73: reading


<b>-</b> Period 74: speaking


<b>-</b> Period 75: listening


<b>-</b> Period 76: writing


<b>-</b> Period 77: language focus


Date of preparing: March 1st 2008 Period 73


Unit 12-

Period 1- Reading



<b>I, Objective</b>



By the end of the lession, Ss will be able to:
- use vocabulary items related to music


- guess the meaning of words based on contexts
- scan for specific information about music<b>.</b>
<b>II. Teaching aids</b>: textbook, handouts, board.


<b>III. Procedure</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>



<b>10</b>’


<b>BEFORE YOU READ</b>
<b>Matching</b>


- T ask Ss to read aloud the types of music in columnnn A to make sure that
they pronuonce them correctly.


- Ss give the Vietnamese equipvalents of the types of music.


- T ask Ss to work in pairs to match each types of music in column A with
its description in column B.


- T asks some Ss to give the answers
- T gives feedback and the correct answers:
1. b 2. e 3. d 4. a 5. c


<b>Pre-teaching vocabulary</b>


Note: T should only teach the words which do not appear in Task 1.
- T elitcits or teaches some vocabulary items:


<i>1. Express (v): state thoughts or feeling in words, show meaning by </i>
<i>gesture, behaviour,…(biªđ lé, thĨ hiƯn)</i>


<i>2. Convey (v): express sth (biĨu lé, thĨ hiƯn)</i>


<i>3. Funeral (n): ceremony fỏ someone who has died (đám ma)</i>
<i>4. Solemn (adj): humorless, formal (trang trọng, trang nghiêm).</i>
<i>5. Sense (n): physical faculty (giác quan)</i>



<i> -</i> T may ask some Ss to make sentences with the above words to check their
understanding.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b>8</b>’


<b>while you read</b>
<i><b>Task 1: Gap filling based on word meaning guessing</b></i>


<b>Instruction: </b>Fill each blank with one of the words in the box. All of the
words appear in the reading passage.


-T writes these words on the board:


<i>Emtion, lull, communicate, delight, intergral part, mourful, solemn.</i>
Continue with the rest of the sentences.


-T ask Ss too work individually to do the task.


- T ask Ss to exchange their answers eith other Ss.


- T ask Ss for their answers and tells them to explain their choises.
- T gives the correct answers:


<i><b>1.</b></i> communicate 5. solemn


<i><b>2.</b></i> lull 6. emotion


<i><b>3.</b></i> delight 7. mournful
intergral part



<i><b>Task 2: Answering questions</b></i>


Instruction: <i>You are to read the passage again and answer the questions in </i>
<i>the book.</i>


– T instructs Ss to use some strategies to do the task:


+ First, skim the five questions to understand them. As Ss do this they:


 underline the key words. For instance, in question 1 Ss can
underline <i>what, two things, human, different, animals.</i>


 decide what information they need to find in the text look
for questions words like “why” which indicates Ss should read for specific
thing like a reason.


+Continue with the rest of the questions.
- Ask Ss to work individually to do the task.
- Ask Ss to discuss their answers with their peers.


- Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board and ask them to
explain their choises.


- Give the correct answers:


<i>1</i> <i>Language and music </i>(line 2)


<i>2</i> <i>It can express ideas, thoughts and feelings (lines 3-6)</i>



3. .It adds joyfulness to the atmosphere of a festival and makes
afuneral more solemn and mourful.<i> (lines 9-11</i>

<i>)</i>



<i>3</i> <i> 4. It makes people happy and excited. It delights the </i>
<i>senses </i>(line13)


<i>4</i> <i> 5. It is a billion- dollar industry</i>.( line 14)
5


Whole class,
individual work
& pair work


<b>10</b>’ <b>after you read</b>


<b>Instruction:</b><i>You are required to work in groups to discuss the question </i>
<i>in the textbook.</i>


- T ask Ss to work in groups of 5 to discuss the two questions in the
book.


- T goes around to help the groups when necessary.


- When all groups have finished, T asks every two groups to share
ideas with each other.


- T calls on some groups to report their ideas to the class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

- T gives feedback.



<b>3</b>’


<b>wrapping up</b>


- T summarises the main points.


- T asks Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and do the extra
exercise as homework.


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



...
...
...
...
...


...


………


...


Date of preparing: March 3rd 2008 Period 74


Unit 12-Period 2-speaking


<b>I, Objective</b>




By the end of the lession, the Ss will be able to:
- ask and answers questions about music
- talk about favorite kinds of music


<b>II, Materials</b>



Textbook, pictures/posters


<b>III, Anticipated problems</b>



Ss may not have enough vocabulary to talk about the topic, so T should be ready to provide
help.


IV. Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


7’ <b>WARM-UP</b>


<b>Competition game- matching</b>


- T divides the class into group of 4 or 5.


- T gives each group a set of pictures of foreign singers
and slips of paper containing their names.


- Ss work in group and quickly match the singers and
names some of their songs.



<i><b>Answers:</b></i>


1.Nick Carter 2. Britney Spears
3.Christina Aguilera 4. Alicia Keys
5. Justin Timberlake


Group work


8’ <b>Task 1: Answering questions based on the reading text.</b>
<b>Instruction:</b><i> You going to read what Ha Anh says about music. </i>
<i>Work in pairs to answer the questions.</i>


- T asks some Ss to read aloud the passage.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

12’


- T elicits or teaches some words.


<i><b>1.</b></i> <i>Keep sb happy: make sb happy (lµm cho ai vui)</i>


<i><b>2.</b></i> <i>Cheer sb up: make sb feel less sad (làm cho ai đỡ buồn,</i>
<i>phấn chấn)</i>


<i><b>3.</b></i> <i>Band (n): a group ß musicians who play togetther (ban </i>
<i>nh¹c)</i>


<i><b>4.</b></i> <i>Easy to listen to: dƠ nghe</i>


- T asks Ss to work in pairs to answers the 4 questions in


the book.


- T goes around to observe Ss working.
- T asks some Ss to present their answers.
- T gives feedback and gives correct answers:
<i>1.She likes pop music</i>


<i>2.Because it keeps her happy</i>
<i>3.The Backstreet Boys</i>


<i>4.She listens to music all the time.</i>


<i><b>Task 2: Asking and answers about music taste</b></i>


<b>Instruction: </b><i>You are going to two of your classmates to get</i>
<i>the information to complete the table.</i>


- Here are some suggested questions:
+ What kind of music do you like?
+ Why do you like it?


+ Who is your favorite singer/musician?
+ What is your favorite song/ piece of music?
+ When do you listen to music?


- T can introduce some adj and expressions to talk about
music and the imfortance of music:


+Make sb excited
+ Make sb feel relaxed



+ help sb forget troubles and worries
+ relaxing (adj)


+ peaceful (adj)….


- T tells Ss to form groups of 3. One of them will be a
journalist who wants to interview high-school students
about their music tapes. The journalist has to ask the
two students somw questions ans fill in the table for
his/her later article. Ss can change their roles if time
permits.


<i>-</i> T goes around observing, offering help and collecting
any mistakes and errors for later correction.


<i><b>Task 3: Reporting on the information</b></i>


<b>Instruction: </b><i>Now report what you have found out to the whole </i>
<i>class.</i>


- Before Ss report, T elicits the structures they can use:
+ Both A and B like….


+ A likes …., and so does B.
+ A likes…, and B does, too.
+ A likes…, but B prefers…


Whole class &
group work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

+ prefer sth to sth


- T calls on some Ss to report what they have found out
about their partners.


- T takes notes of Ss’s mistake for later correction.


7’ <b>FEEDBACK AND CORRECTION</b>


- T writes some typical mistakes and errors on the board
for peer correction.


- T provides correction when necessary.


Whole class


3’ <b>wrapping up</b>


- T summarises the main points.


- T asks Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and do
the extra exercise as homework.


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



...
...


...
...
...


...


………


...


Date of preparing: March 1st 2008 Period 75


Unit 12-

Period 3-Listening



<b>I, Objective</b>



- Develop extensive listening skills.


- Use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks about Van Cao.


<b>II. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


.March



……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………

IV. Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


7’ <b>WARM-UP</b>


<b>Competition game </b>–<b> Network</b>


- T ask Ss to work in groups to complete a network with the
word “musicican” as quickly as possible. T can print thid


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

handout and distribute one copy to each group.


- The first group to produce the correct and coplete network
will be the winner.


Note: The words to fill in the network are quit open. T and Ss


should make sure that all the names are correctly written down.


10’ <b>BEFORE YOU LISTEN</b>


<b>Talking about Van Cao</b>


- T ask Ss to look at the pictureon page 127 and tell the class
anything they know about Van Cao.


- Then T reads the names of the songs on page 128 out loud.
Whenerver T speaks out a song name, Ss say whether it is a
Van Cao’s song or not. If the song is not one by Van Cao, T
can ask Ss if they knw who wrote that song.


<i><b>Answers:</b></i>


<i>+ Van Cao s songa: Suoi Mo (1), Tien Quan Ca (3), Truong Ca ’</i>
<i>Song Lo (4), Lang Toi (5).</i>


<i>+ Tinh Ca was written by Hoang Viet</i>


<i>+ Ha Noi Mua Thu was written by Vu Thanh.</i>


<b>Vocabulary pre-teaching</b>


- Before eliciting/pre-teaching some new words, T helps Ss to
prounoun the words given in the book. T may read aloud
first and ask Ss to repeat in chorus and individually.
- T elicits/ teaches some of these words or those taken from



the listening passage.


<i>1. Rousing (adj): filling people with passion,, emotion and </i>
<i>enthsiam (lµm phÊn chÊn).</i>


<i>2. Lyrical (adj): widely enthusiastic and emotional about sth </i>
<i>(trữ tình)</i>


<i>3. Rural (adj): found in or living in the countryside (thc vỊ </i>
<i>n«ng th«n)</i>


- T asks Ss which of the adjective provided can be used to
describe Van Cao’s music


Whole class


8’ <b>WHILE YOU LISTEN</b>


<i><b>Task 1: True/ False</b></i>


<b>Instruction:</b>You are going to listen to<i> an interview in which lan </i>
<i>Huong, the interviewer, asks Quang Hung, a famous actor about </i>
<i>Van Cao. Listen and decide whether the statements are true or </i>
<i>false. Put a tick in the appropriate box.</i>


- Before Ss listen and do the task, T instructs them to use
some stragies:


+ First, read through the statements to understand them and
underline key words. For example, the key words in the first


statements are: <i>guess of the show, Lan…</i>


+ Listen to the tape and pay attention to the key words.


+ Decide whether the statements are true or false based on what
they can hear.


- T plays the tape once for Ss to do the task.


- T asks for Ss’s answers and writes them on the board.
- T plays the tape the second time for Ss to check their


answers.


- T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 to compare their answers.
- T checks Ss’s answers by calling some Ss to give ans


explain their answers.


- If a lot of Ss have the same wrong answers, play that point
of the tape for Ss to check the answers again.


- T gives the correct answers.


Individual
work, group work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<i>1. F (The guest is Quang Hung)</i>


2. <i>F (He likes some Vietnamese musicians).</i>


3. <i>T</i>


4. <i>F (It was written in 1994)</i>


5. <i>F (He always feels proud of his country when he hears the </i>
<i>song)</i>


<i><b>Task 2: Answering questions</b></i>


<b>Instruction:</b><i> You are going to listen to the tape again to anwer the </i>
<i>questions.</i>


- Write down the answers.


- T can ask Ss whether they can do the task based on the
previos times of listening.


- If Ss can, T asks them to give the answers and write them on
the board.


- T plays the tape once for Ss to check their answers.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs to compare their answers.
- T checks Ss’s answers by calling some Ss to give ans


explain their answers.


- If a lot of Ss have the same wrong answers, play that point
of the tape for Ss to check the answers again.


- T gives the correct answers:


<i>1. It s My Favorite Musiccian .’ “</i> <i>”</i>
<i>2. Tien Quan Ca</i>


3. <i>It s hard and solemn, it makes him feel great and proud of ’</i>
<i>his country.</i>


whole class,
Individual
work & pair work


10’ <b>AFTER YOU LISTEN</b>


<b>Find someone who…</b>


- T draws the following table on the board and asks Ss to
summarise Quang Hung’s ideas about Van Cao’s music. T
writes their ideas in the first column.


<b>Quang Hung s</b>’


<b>ideas</b>


<b>Person </b>
<b>who agree</b>


<b>Person who</b>
<b>disagree</b>


<b>reason (s)</b>



1. The best
Vietnamese
musician of all
times is Van Cao
2. Tien Quan ca is
hard and solemn
3. His songs about
rural life in


Vietnam are sweet,
gentle and very
lyrical.


- T gives Ss 5 minutes to interview. After that time, any students
who finish filling the table will be the winner. Call on some of them
to report the results to the whole class.


whole class &
group work


3’ <b>wrapping up</b>


- T summarises the main points.


- T asks Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and do the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

extra exercise as homework.


Evaluation

<b>.</b>




...
...
...
...
...…


...
...


...
...


...
...


Date of preparing: March 6th 2008 Period 76


Unit 12-

Period 4- Writing



<b>I, Objective</b>



- Write a profile based on promts provided


<b>III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5



.March


……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………

IV. Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


7’ <b>WARM-UP</b>


<b>Competition game- Guessing</b>


- T prints the following handout with simplified profiles of
several Vienamese and foreign singers and musicians.
<b>1.</b> Born on in February 28, 1939 in L¹c Giao(a highland in


the middle part of Vietnam)
Grew up in Hue.



Wrote more than 990 songs including ít mi, diƠm xa, nèi
<i>vßng tay lín, nhí mïa thu Hµ Néi…</i>


Died on April 1, 2001 in Ho Chi Minh City
<b>2.</b> Born in 1967 in Ha Noi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Graduated from Hanoi Conservatory in 1993


Famous for such songs as<i>Chiều xuân, Thì Thầm Mùa Xuân, </i>
<i>Cô TÊm ngµy nay, Ban Mai Xanh, Mïa Thu Vµng….</i>


- T divides the class into 8 groups and gives each group a
handout.


- T asks Ss to read the profiles and find the name of each
singer and musician as quickly as posible.


- The winner will be the group with the quickest and correct
answers.


<i><b>Answers:</b></i>


1. Trịnh Công Sơn
2. Ngọc Châu


10


12



<b>PREPARING SS TO WRITE</b>
<i><b>Task 1: Sentence completion</b></i>


- Before Ss do the task, T asks them what tense of verbs they
should use in this task. T reminds Ss that he simple past
tense should be used here as the musician died.Also, Ss
should supplement the past tense of “be”, preposition,
articles….where necessary.


- T divides Ss into groups of 6. Each group member will
write a sentence.


- T goess around to help.


- T calls on 6 Ss to go to the board and each of them will
write down a sentence.


- T gives suggested answers:


<i>1. He learnt to play music when he was very young.</i>
<i>Scott learnt to play the words of composers like Bach, </i>
<i>Beethoven and Mozart as well as to compose music.</i>
<i>2. He quickly became famous.</i>


<i>3. His tunes were wonderful mixture of classical European </i>
<i>and African beats which were known as Ragtime.</i>


<i>4. All in all, he wrote 50 piano rags and was called the King </i>
<i>of Ragtime.</i>



<i>5. Scott died in 1917.</i>


<i><b>Task 2:Profile writing</b></i>


<b>Instruction:</b><i> you are going to write a life story of Van Cao using </i>
<i>the prompts provied.</i>


- Before Ss do the task, T asks them to read theough prompts.
T reminds Ss to use the right tense of verbs and supplement
articles, preposition, pronoun….when necessary.


- T asks Ss ro write the frofile individuall in 10 minutes.


Whole class


whole class &
group work


Individual
work


8’ <b>FEEDBACK ON SS WRITING</b>’


- T asks Ss to exchange their letter with another student for
peer correction.


- T collects some writing for quick feedback.


- T writes Ss’s typical errors on the board and elicits self and
peer correction, T provides correction only when Ss are not



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

able to correct the errors.


- Finally, T provides general comments on the profiles.


2’ <b>wrapping up</b>


- T summarises the main points.


- T asks Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and do the
extra exercise as homework.


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



...
...
...
...
...…


...
...


...
...


...
...



Date of preparing: March 10th 2008 Period 77


Unit 12-Period 5-language focus


<b>I. Objectives</b>:


After the lesson, students will be able to write letters of acceptance and refusal.


<b>II. Teaching aids</b>: textbook, handouts, board.


III. Organiration



Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


.March


……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………


………


IV. Procedure



<i><b>Time</b></i> <i><b>Steps</b></i> <i><b>Work</b></i>


<i><b>arrangement</b></i>


15’ <b>PRONUNCIATION</b>


<b>Pronuoncing the two sounds separately:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

- T models the two sounds twice or three times.
- T pronounces the sounds and asks Ss to repeat.
- Ss practice pronoouncing the sounds in chorus and


indiviadually.
- T give feedback.


13’ <b>GRAMMAR 1</b>


<b>To + infinitive to express purfoses.</b>
<b>a.Presentation:</b>


- T writes some sentences on the board and underline the
to+infinitive;


<i>I get up early every morning to cook breakfast for my family.</i>
<i>Women should eat a lot of fruit to stay young and beautiful.</i>
<i>Mai phoned Lan yesterday to invite her to go to the cinema.</i>


- T asks Ss to comment on the use of <i>to+</i>infinitive in the


examples


Practice 1:


<b>Task 1: Answer the question</b>


- T asks sts to read the example before doing?
- T walks around to help.


- T requires each group do 2 sentences


- Calls on some pairs to read the ques and answers in front of the
class


- Give feedback
KEY:


1. I phoned her to hear the good news.


2. I am saving money to buy a cassette player.
3. She practices singing to attent the singing contest
4. I am learning Friench to sing French songs
5. ... to be a good example for the class


Grammar 2


Wh- questions:



When? time


Where? place


who? person


why? reason


How? manner


What? object/ idea/ action...


which? choice


Whose? possession


Whom? Person(o)


How much? price , amount(non-count)


How many? quantity(count)


How long? frequentcy


How often? duration


How far? distance


Practice2



<b>Exercise 3:</b>


- T make the task easier that sts can do them.
using multiple choise.


whole class


Group work and
pair work


2’ <b>wrapping up</b>


- T summarises the main points.


- T asks Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and do the
extra exercise as homework.


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



...
...
...
...
...…


...


………



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

...
...


...
...


Date of preparing : March 11th 2008


Unit 13: Film and cinema


<b>I. Objectives:</b>




<b>Reading:</b>


<b>- </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific
ideas, guessing meaning in context.


- Use the information they have read to discuss the topic.


<b>Skills </b> <b>Speaking:</b>


- Talk about the films and cinemas .


- Sts say their opinion about each kind of films


<b>AIMS</b> <b>Listening: </b>


- Develop extensive listening skills.



- Use the information they have listened to for other
communicative tasks about Titanic.


<b>Writing</b>


- Write description about a film their like


<b>Language </b>


<b>focus</b> <b>1. Pronunciation:</b>- Distinguish the clusters / f /, / v / and pronounce the words and
dialogue containing them correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- It is/ was not ultil...that
- a/ an/ the


Adj of attitude


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, text book ...


<b>III. Devision of the unit:</b>
<b>-</b> Period 78: reading


<b>-</b> Period 79: speaking



<b>-</b> Period 80: listening


<b>-</b> Period 81: writing


<b>-</b> Period 82: language focus


Date of preparing: February 14th 2008 Period 78


Unit 13- Lesson 1- Reading


<b> I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>- </b>Develop such reading micro- skills as scanning for specific ideas, guessing meaning in
context.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

<b> II. Materials:</b>
<b></b>


<b>--</b> Textbook , handout , ….


<b>III. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5 ……….March 2008……….


...



………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>VII.</b> <b>Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5
minutes


Warm- up


Quoc Tuan
- Sts close the books then discus :


Brainstorming: Thanh Loc
_ T leads to the new lesson





T shows some pictures of famous actors/ actresses



Group work or
individual work


10
minutes


Pre- reading


<b>1.Look at the picture ( 112 )</b>


- T ask some questions about the pictures . and sts annswer the questions in the
book


<b>2. Vocabulary:</b>


<i>motion(n) sự chuyển động</i>
<i>decade(n)= ten yaers</i>
<i>existence(n) sự tồn tại</i>
<i>character(n)nhân vật</i>
<i>audience(n)khán giả</i>
<i>silent(adj)im lặng</i>


- Read after the teacher, tress,


- T calls some Sts to read the words aloud.


- T repeats the words if the Sts don’t read correctly.
- Using drup out and remember method to check.
- T gives feedback.



Individual work
Whole class


5
minutes


While- reading


<b>1. Task 1( 133 ): Filling= > matching</b>
<b> </b>


- Sts read the text silently then do the text 1.
- T gets Sts to check their answers with a peer.


- T calls some sts to write their answers on the board,
the others read their answers,


then ask them to explain their choices.
- T gives corrective feedback.


KEY:


Group work


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<i>1.cinema 2. sequentce 3. decade </i>
<i>4. rapidly 5. scene 6. character</i>


5
minutes



<b>2. Task 2: (133 )</b>


- Sts read the text again if they cannot do the task without reading the
passage.


- First, Sts should skim the 6 questions to understand them.


- Sts underlined the key words to decide what information they need to find
in the text.


- Then they should go back to the passage and locate the key words in the
passage.


- Sts check the answers with their friends.


- T calls on some Sts to present and explain their answers
- T gives feedback and correct answers.


KEY:


<i>1. in the early 19th century</i>


<i>2. At that time scientists discovered that a sequence of still pictures were set in </i>
<i>motion, they could give the feeling of movement..</i>


<i>3. No, they didn't.</i>


<i>4. Audiences were able to see long films in the early 1920</i>
<i>5. The sound was intrduced at the end of the 1920s</i>



<i>6. As the old silent films were being replaced by spoken one, the musical film.</i>


Individual work
and whole class


12
minutes


Post- reading




Task 3 : Deciding:


- T goes around to check and offer help.


- Sts share your pair’ s opinions with the others.
- T calls on some Sts to read their translations.
- T gives corrective feedback.


KEY:
.B. .


Group work


2
minutes


Homework



- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
T asks Sts to retell the text.


- Do <b>after you read</b>


Self- evaluation:


………
………...
...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Unit 11- Lesson 2- speaking


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b> </b> - Express the excursion


<b> II. Materials:</b>


- Picture, text book, handout….


<b> III. Organiration</b>:


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5 ……….February 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b> IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work</b>


<b>arrangement</b>


10 minutes


Warm- up


T uses the pictures in reading period and asks sts:


1. Do you like to have an excursion with your classmates?
2. Where will you go?


3. What will you take with you?
4. Where will you sleep?


...



=>> Lead to the new lesson: talk about advantages and disadvantages.


Whole class


10 minutes


Pre- Speaking


<b>1. Task 1( 114) Matching</b>


- T asks Sts to work in pair to match the things with the suitable corresponding
consequentces.


- T walks around to explain new words if necessary.


- T calls on some pairs to give their answers and asks other pairs if they agree
or disagree with their friends' answers


- T asks them about the reasons why they agree or disagree.
Key:


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


f e h g b c a d


pair work


7 minutes



While speaking


<b>Task 2 ( 115)</b>


- T introduces the task then ask them to do the task .
<i>(Using the suggestion at page 115)</i>


<i> </i>


- Sts use the <b>Task 1+ the third coditional sentences </b>to talk
- T gets modal with a st in the class.


- Ask st to work in group of three.
- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls on some pairs to read out his/ her answers
- T checks with the class and gives corrective feedback.
KEY:


1. If we had gone by bikes , we wouldn't have a car sick.


2. If we had brought enough food and drinks, we wouldn't have spent alot
money eating in the expensive restaurant.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

3. If some of us hadn't had food poisoning, we would have eyjoyed the visit.
...


13 minutes


Post speaking



<b>Task 3 (115)</b>


Sts imagine that they were Nga to talk about their regrets about what they did
or what they didn't do.


<i>- Sts use the task 1.</i>


- T goes around to check and offer help.


- T calls some Sts to talk about their answers in front of the class.
- T elicits feedback from the class and gives final comments.


Group work
and Whole
class


3 minutes Wrapping up and Homework


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.
Write a passage about your excursion.


Whole class




Self- evaluation:


………
………...


...
...


Date of preparing: February 15th 2008 Period 67


Unit 11- Lesson 3- listening


<b>I. Objectives:</b>


After the lesson, Sts will be able to:
- Develop extensive listening skills.


- Use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks about Cuc Phuong
National


Park


<b>II. Materials:</b>


<b>-</b> Picture, tape, cassette, handout….


<b> III. Organiration. </b>


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1


10A5


.February



……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


5 minutes


Warm- up


- Check the sts' homework.


Whole class


Pre- listening


<b>1: Look at the book and answer the questions:</b>


1. Cuc Phuong National Park is located 160 kms south west of Hanoi.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

10
minutes


3. The best time to visit Cuc Phuong National Park is during the dry season.
4. Butterflies, cave, hike mountains and the 1000-year-old tree can be seen in
Cuc Phuong National Park


T gives correction.


<b>2: Listen and repeat:</b>


- T helps Sts to pronounce the words in the book correctly.


- T plays tape or read aloud the words then asks Sts to repeat after in chorus and
individually.


- Some Sts read the words in front of the class.
- T corrects errors if any.


- T checks that Sts know the meaning of the words.


Whole class


10
minutes


While- listening





<b>Task 1(116)</b>
<b>Filling :</b>


- Sts read through the sentences in task 1 to understand them and
underline the key words. Predict the answers before listening


- Play the tape 2 times
- Check sts’ understanding


- Play the tape again and stop at the sentence keys for sts to remember the
answers and tick.


- Sts compare the answers with the partners.
- Give them correction.


KEY:


1<i>. 1960 2. </i>160 kms south west of <i> 3.100,000 visitors</i>
<i>4. 2,000- 450 5. Quen Voi </i>


Individual work
and pairwork


8 minutes


<b>Task 2 ( 116 )</b>


- Play the tape again



- Sts try to hear the main information.


- Sts ask and the others answer the questions.


- Check sts’ understanding by calling on some Sts to ask and answers in
front of the class.


- Play the tape again to help them if necessary.
- Give feedback.


KEY:


<i>1. It covers 3 provinves: Ninh Binh, Hoa Binh, and Thanh Hoa.</i>
<i>2. It is about 160 km.</i>


<i>3. They come here to see the work being done to protect endangered </i>
<i>species.</i>


<i>4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Quing invaders in the spring of 1789.</i>
<i>5. They live mainly on bee keeping and farming.</i>


Pair work


8 minutes Post- listening


-T plays the tape again then asks sts to repeat the sentences they have heard. Group work


2 minutes


Wrapping up and Homework



- T summarises the main points of the lesson


- Write a paragraph about a camping holiday. Whole class


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

………
………...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...


Date of preparing : January 28th 2008 Period 68


Unit 11:

Period 4: Writing



<b>I. Objectives</b>:


After the lesson, students will be able to write letters of acceptance and refusal.


<b>II. Teaching aids</b>: textbook, handouts, board.


Class Date of teaching Absent pupils


10A1



10A5


.February


……… 2008……….


...


………


………
………
………
………
………
<b>III. Procedure.</b>


<b>Time</b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work <sub>arrangement</sub></b>


<b>6</b>’ Pre-

writing



- Prepares 3 similar sets of statements which are some common way of
inviting, accepting and refusing.


- Divides the class into 3 groups of 9 or 10.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

- Gives each group a set of statements and asks them to put the statements
into the correct column.


- Calls on representative of each group go to board and write down their


answers. (Each group in charge of one column).


<i><b>Suggested answers</b></i>:
4. Inviting: A, B, H
5. Accepting: C, E, G, H.
6. Refusing: D, F, I


- Work group
- Give the
answers to T


<b>4</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>5</b>’


While –

writing



<i>a. Activity 1 : Filling in the blank </i>( Task 1, page 117, textbook)


<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: You are going to complete the letters on page 117 by filling
each blank with one of the ways to accept or refuse an invitation provided in
the table.


- Before Ss do the task, ask Ss to read through the expressions in the table to
understand them.



- Asks Ss to do the task in pairs and reminds them that for each blank they
can have more than one answer.


- Calls on some Ss to go and write their answer on the board.
- Calls for peer correction and gives T’s feedback.


<i><b>Suggested answers</b></i>:


1. That’s a great idea! / I’d like to/ I’d love to.


2. I’m afraid I can’t come because... / I’m sorry I can’t come because...
3. I’d be delighted to.


<i>b. Discuss the features of a letter of acceptance or refusal.</i>


-Analysis 3 letters in the text book to help Ss know how to write acceptance
or refusal letter:


+ Firstly, Ss should thank the addressees for his/ her invitation.


+ Use one of the ways of accepting or refusing to reply invitation letter. If Ss
refuse, they should remember to give reason for turning down the invitation;
and an alternative date or activity is often suggested.


<i>c. Activity 2: Ordering</i> (Task 2, page upload.123doc.net, textbook)


<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: You are required to arrange the sentences in the correct order to
make a letter of accepting an invitation to spend a weekend in the country.
- Asks Ss to do the task individually and exchange their answer with another
student when they have finished.



- Calls on a student to read the letter out loud and asks other Ss to listen and
give feedback.


- Comments and gives the correct order:
1d 2e 3c 4a 5f 6b
<i>d. Activity 3: Rearranging 2 letters. </i>(Handout)


- Ask Ss to work in pair and rearrange jumbled sentence to make two
complete letters.


- Calls on 2 students to write their answers on the board.
- Comments and gives the correct order:


Accepting: 1c, 2g, 3b, 4i, 5e/ 1c, 2g, 3b, 4e, 5i.
Refusing: 6j, 7a, 8h, 9d, 10f


<i>e. Activity 4: Writing a letter of acceptance or refusal.</i> (Task 3, page
upload.123doc.net, textbook).


- Listen to T
- Pair work


-Whole class.


- Listen to T


- Individual and
pair work



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>10</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<i><b>Instruction</b></i>: One of your friends has invited you to go for a picnic to Cuc
Phuonng National Park next weekend. Write a reply letter or declining his/
her invitation.


- Ask Ss to write the letter individually.


- Reminds them to pay attention to all the features of this type of letter.
- While Ss write the letter, T goes around to observe and provides help.
<i>f. Feedback on Ss writings.</i>’


- Ask Ss to exchange their letter with another student for peer correction.
- Goes around and collects mistakes and errors.


- Collects some writings for quick feedback.


- Write Ss’ typical errors on the board and elicits self and peer correction. T
provides correction only when Ss are not able to correct the errors.


- Individual
work.


- Pair work and
whole class


<b>3</b>’



Post –

writing

:


- Summarizes themain point.


- Homework: asks Ss to write a letter of acceptance or refusal (if they have
written a letter of acceptance in class, at home they will write letter of
refusal and vice versa)


Whole class


Evaluation

<b>.</b>



_...
...
...


_ ...
...


_...
...


...


...
...


Date of preparing : February 16th 2008 Period 69


Unit 11- Lesson 5- language focus



<b>I. Objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson, Sts will be able to:


<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>


- Distinguish the clusters / t /, / d /, and pronounce the words and dialogue containing them
correctly.


<b>2. Grammar:</b>


- Conditional sentences type 3


<b>II. Materials:</b>


- Handout, text book, cassette, CDs ….
<b>III. Organization:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

10A1


10A5


.Febuary


……… 2008……….


...


………



………
………
………
………
………
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>


<b>Time </b> <b>Steps</b> <b>Work </b>


<b>arrangement</b>


7 minutes


Pronunciation:


- <b>1. Distinguish these sound: </b>/ t /, / d/,
- T models 2 sounds / t /, / d /, three times
- T explains how to produce them


- T plays the tape once for sts to hear the words containing these sounds, plays
again and ask sts to read follow the tape.


- Ask sts to read the words in each column out loud in chorus for a few more
times


- call someone to read out loud


- Listen then correct if sts read the target words incorrectly.



2. <b>Practising sentences containing target sounds:</b>


- Ask then to take turn to read aloud the given sentences
- - T goes around to listen an dtakes notes of the typical errors.
- T calls on some Sts to read again and provides corrective feedback.


Whole class


Pair work and
group work


10
minutes


Grammar:


<b>1 Presentation1:</b>


T reintroduces about Conditional sentences type 2
Then ask them to do the tasks follow.


Type Form Use + Example


1 If + S + simple present, S +
will + Vn


In these sentences, the time is the
present or future and the situation is
real. They refer to a possible



condition and its probable result
Eg: If you are sad, I'll make you
happy.


She will visit her grandparent at
weekend if she has time.


2 If + S + past simple, S +
would/ could + Vn


Like type 1, type 2 refers to the
present or future, and the past tense
in the if- clause is not a true past but
a subjunctive, which indicates
unreality and improbability.


Eg; If I were a beautiful girl like Ha
Kieu Anh, I would be famous.
He would fly to school if he were a
bird.


3 If + S + past perfect, S + would
have + PII


The time is past, and the condition
can't be fulfilled because the action
in the if- clause didn't happen.
Eg: If I had known her address last
Sunday, I would have invited her to
go camping.



Individual work
and whole class


2. Practice


<b>Task 1(119 )</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 1 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.


<b>KEY: 1. </b>had known 2. had had
3. would have gone 4. would have passed
5. could have enjoyed 6. had known


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

12
minutes


<b> </b>7. had stopped 8. had called


<b>Task 2( 119)</b>


- T gets Sts to do exercise 2 individually and then find a partner to check their
answers with.


- T checks with the whole class and provides corrective feedback.
Key:



<i>1. If the driver in front hadn't stopped suddently the accident wouldn't have </i>
<i>happened</i>


<i>2. If I had known that Lam has to get up early, I would have woken him up</i>
<i>...</i>


Pair work &
whole class


10
minutes


<b>Task 3 ( 120) </b>


- T divides the class into 5 groups.


- Each group has done a sentence from 1 to 5.
- Corrects the sts' sentences with the whole class.
KEY:


<i>1.If I had been working at the restaurant last night, I would have waited on </i>
<i>your table .</i>


<i>2. If he had paid attention, he would have seen the sign making their exit from </i>
<i>the highway</i>


<i>3. Carol would have answered the phone if she hadn't been studying</i>
<i>4. ...</i>


Group work



3 minutes


wrapping- up


- T summarises the main points of the lesson.


For homework: T asks Sts to revise conditional sentences and make more
axamples


Whole class


Self- evaluation:


_...
...
...


_ ...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157></div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×